Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
Important
Please read this entire guide. If this guide provides installation or operation
instructions, give particular attention to all safety statements included in this guide.
Notices
Trademark Acknowledgments
Cisco, Cisco Systems, the Cisco logo, the Cisco Systems logo, Scientific Atlanta,
the Scientific Atlanta logo, ROSA, Copernicus, and SciCare are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S.
and certain other countries.
All other trademarks shown are trademarks of their respective owners.
Publication Disclaimer
Cisco Systems, Inc., assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may
appear in this publication. We reserve the right to change this publication at any time
without notice. This document is not to be construed as conferring by implication,
estoppel, or otherwise any license or right under any copyright or patent, whether or
not the use of any information in this document employs an invention claimed in any
existing or later issued patent.
Copyright
2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. No part of this
publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by photocopy, microfilm,
xerography, or any other means, or incorporated into any information retrieval
system, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express permission of
Cisco Systems, Inc.
4011746 Rev P v
Contents
Notices v
Preface xv
Chapter 1 Introduction 1
Introducing the Digital Content Manager............................................................................ 2
General ......................................................................................................................... 2
Modular Concept ........................................................................................................ 4
Principle ....................................................................................................................... 5
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface ...................................................................... 6
About the Web Browser User Interface ................................................................... 6
Using the Web Browser User Interface.................................................................... 7
Web Browser User Interface Security ................................................................................. 10
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 10
Logging On or Off the Web Browser User Interface............................................ 11
Configuring the Security.......................................................................................... 12
Login Page Information ........................................................................................... 15
Licensing ................................................................................................................................. 17
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 17
Obtaining License Files ............................................................................................ 18
Checking the License Overview ............................................................................. 18
Install a New License File ........................................................................................ 19
Checking the Version Information ...................................................................................... 22
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 22
To Check the Version Information ......................................................................... 23
Importing and Exporting Device Settings.......................................................................... 24
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 24
Exporting Configuration Settings........................................................................... 24
Importing Configuration Settings .......................................................................... 26
Restarting the System............................................................................................................ 28
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 28
To Restart the DCM System .................................................................................... 29
Chapter 2 Configuration 33
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 34
Changing the Device Name..................................................................................... 34
Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations................................................... 36
Activating or Deactivating the DCM ..................................................................... 39
Setting the Device Clock .......................................................................................... 41
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports ....................... 45
Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports ............................ 48
Configuring IP Security ........................................................................................... 50
Card Configuration ............................................................................................................... 55
Changing the Name of an Interface Card.............................................................. 55
ASI Port Configuration ......................................................................................................... 56
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 56
To Configure an ASI Input Port.............................................................................. 57
To Configure an ASI Output Port .......................................................................... 59
To Configure a Mirror Port ..................................................................................... 61
Checking the ASI Port Parameters ......................................................................... 62
GbE Port Configuration ........................................................................................................ 64
Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port ........................................... 64
Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries....................................................... 71
Adapting the Static Route Table ............................................................................. 74
Configuring VLAN................................................................................................... 77
Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups.................................. 80
Checking the Routes to Destination Devices ........................................................ 83
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature ...................................................................... 85
Checking the GbE Statistics..................................................................................... 88
Changing the Display Mode ................................................................................................ 92
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 92
To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs .............. 92
To Change the Display Mode of Private Data and Generated EMM
PIDs.......................................................................................................................... 93
Chapter 3 Multiplexing 95
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services ........................................................................ 96
Introducing the Services Trees................................................................................ 96
Changing Tree Settings .......................................................................................... 107
Representation Mode of the Incoming Services ................................................. 112
Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree ............................................... 116
Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams................................... 118
Settings of Incoming Services................................................................................ 118
Settings of Incoming Transport Streams ............................................................. 120
iv 4011746 Rev P
Contents
4011746 Rev P v
Contents
vi 4011746 Rev P
Contents
Checking the DCM Devices to which a Transport Stream Belongs ................ 435
Starting and Stopping Scrambling ....................................................................... 436
Event logging........................................................................................................... 437
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................. 438
4011746 Rev P ix
Contents
x 4011746 Rev P
Contents
Glossary 655
Index 671
4011746 Rev P xi
Safe Operations
Safe Operations
The software described in this guide is used to monitor and / or manage Cisco
equipment. Certain safety precautions should be observed when operating
equipment of this nature.
For product specific safety requirements refer to the appropriate section of the
documentation accompanying your product.
Preface
Introduction
This configuration guide provides the necessary information to configure and to
operate the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 using the web browser
user interface of the device. In this configuration guide the Digital Content Manager
(DCM) Model D9900 is further indicated by DCM.
Audience
The audience of this configuration guide includes authorized and trained personnel
who are responsible for the configuration and operation of the DCM.
Required Knowledge
To use this configuration guide, the personnel should have a basic knowledge about
the technology used in relation to this product.
Related Publication
Refer to the following Scientific Atlanta publications for more information
concerning the DCM:
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - System Guide, part number 4011745.
This guide is shipped with the DCM.
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - Data Sheet, this data sheet can be
found on the Scientific Atlanta web site at the following location:
http://www.scientificatlanta.com/products/customers/catalog_transmission.htm
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application Note, part
number 4022070
ROSA Network Management System - User's Guide, part number 4014778
ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide, part number 4005743
ROSA Element Manager - Installation and Operation Guide, part number 4006813
IIOP Protocol Driver - User's Guide, part number 6985041
SI Editor Task Driver - User's Guide, part number 6985061
Statmux Pool Manager - User's Guide, part number 4022297
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide, part number 6985066
4011746 Rev P xv
Preface
Document Version
This is the thirteenth release of this configuration guide.
In This Chapter
Introducing the Digital Content Manager........................................... 2
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface ..................................... 6
Web Browser User Interface Security ................................................ 10
Licensing ................................................................................................ 17
Checking the Version Information ..................................................... 22
Importing and Exporting Device Settings......................................... 24
Restarting the System........................................................................... 28
Using the Identify Me Utility .............................................................. 31
4011746 Rev P 1
Chapter 1 Introduction
Scientific
Atlanta
Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Cont
PS 1 ent Manager
(DCM)
PS 2
The main purposes of the DCM are re-multiplexing and grooming of content. The
DCM supports advanced PSI and descriptor handling capabilities. To facilitate the
configuration of content into logical outgoing program groups the DCM also
supports extensive Transport Stream and program analysis including program level
bit rate measurements on both the incoming and outgoing streams.
2 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Digital Content Manager
The Co-Processor card allows rate shaping for bandwidth capacity optimization
purposes, like re-compression to lower bit rates of individual services and open loop
statistical re-multiplexing. This card can also be used for Digital Program Insertion
(ad splicing) on Standard Definition (SD) stream as well as on High Definition (HD)
streams. Splicing on component level allows for seamless insertion of regional
content into existing Transport Streams. The built-in DVB compliant scrambler of the
Co-Processor Card allows easy integration with several Conditional Access (AC)
systems. Integrating multiple CA systems at the same time is possible through the
Simulcrypt interface. These Co-Processor Card functionalities are enabled via
licenses.
DCM's Statmux feature controls statistical multiplexing of Scientific Atlanta encoders
via IP communication.
The DCM supports hot swappable and redundant power supply units and hot
swappable cooling fans. The DCM can be configured in a hot 1: 1 configuration and
supports port and service redundancy.
The DCM is controlled via a simple and intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI) and
can also be integrated into Scientific Atlanta's ROSA Network Management System
(NMS).
4011746 Rev P 3
Chapter 1 Introduction
Modular Concept
The DCM is a fully modular concept built around a 2 RU high housing. The flexible
modular concept ensures easy system capacity upgrades. The following illustration
represents the modular concept of the DCM.
I/O GbE
10/100 3 4
1 2
PS 1
PS 2
4 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Digital Content Manager
Principle
The DCM contains the following functional blocks:
Power supply units (PSU)
Power Distribution Card
Main Card
ASI Interface Card
GbE Interface Card with or without FEC option
Co-Processor Card
The following block diagram depicts the functional blocks of a DCM equipped with
two ASI Interface Cards and two GbE Interface Cards each provided with
Co-Processor Card and FEC option.
Co-Processor
Card GbE
10/100/BaseT
Interfaces
10 ASI
Front Panel
Status LEDs
Co-Processor FEC
Card Card
Interfaces
4 GbE
GbE Interface
Card
Co-Processor
Card
Interfaces
10 ASI
ASI Interface
Card
Co-Processor FEC
Card Card
Data
Interfaces
4 GbE
Control
GbE Interface
Card Power Supply
Status
4011746 Rev P 5
Chapter 1 Introduction
Notes:
The procedure to log on the web browser user interface can be found in topic Web
Browser User Interface Security on page 10.
The Login page of the DCM can be provided with additional information. More
information concerning Login page information can be found in topic Login Page
Information on page 15.
6 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface
Some of the short-cut menu options carry out commands immediately, and other
options display a sub page so that additional parameters can be entered or checked.
4011746 Rev P 7
Chapter 1 Introduction
When changes are made to settings on a certain page or sub page, clicking on the
Apply command button will send these new settings to the DCM.
Note: When settings are changed on multiple pages or sub pages, only the settings
on the page or sub page for which the Apply command button is pressed, are sent to
the DCM.
When settings are accidentally changed on a certain page or sub page, clicking on the
Reload command button restores these settings to the previous settings as long as the
Apply command button on this page or sub page is not pressed. The Reload
command button can also be used to update readouts on the page or sub page to
which the command button belongs to.
Image Legend
A description of the icons used by the web browser user interface of the DCM can be
found on the help - Legend sub page. The following procedure explains how to
display the help - Legend sub page.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Legend link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The help - Legend sub page is displayed.
8 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface
Deactivate this popup blocking software if you use the web browser user interface of
the DCM.
4011746 Rev P 9
Chapter 1 Introduction
Notes:
Both the User Name and Password are case-sensitive.
Similar user names cannot be used, even when uppercase and lowercase
characters are combined, e.g. user and User.
For security reason each action done to the DCM using the web browser user
interface will be logged into the Security Log or Action Log. More information
concerning these logs can be found in topic Viewing Trace Logs on page 610.
10 4011746 Rev P
Web Browser User Interface Security
1 On the Login page of the DCM web browser user interface, enter the user name in
the User Name box and the password in the Password box.
Note: Both parameters are case sensitive.
2 Press the Login command button to confirm.
Result: You are logged on to the web browser user interface and the Service page is
displayed. The user name of the security account that is logged on appears in the
Login link.
Note: After 30 minutes user interface inactivity, the web browser user interface of the
DCM will automatically be logged off.
To Log Off
The following step explains how to log off the DCM web browser user interface.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Logout link.
Result: The web browser user interface is logged off and the Login page is displayed.
4011746 Rev P 11
Chapter 1 Introduction
Tip: The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
3 In the User Name box of the Add New User table, enter a name for the new
account.
4 In the Security Group drop down box, select the Security Group to which the
new account has to belong.
5 In the Password and Re-enter Password box, enter the password for the new
account.
6 Press the Add command button.
Result: The new Security Account is added to the Security Accounts table.
12 4011746 Rev P
Web Browser User Interface Security
Note: When a user is logged on using a Security Account that belongs to the Users or
Guests Security Group, the Security link is not applicable.
3 In the Security Accounts table, adapt the following parameters of the Security
Account for which settings should be changed:
When the name of the Security Account should be changed, enter the new
name in the corresponding User Name box.
When the Security Account has to belong to another Security Group, select the
desired group in the Security Group drop down box.
When the password should be changed, tick the corresponding check box and
enter the new password in both password boxes.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing the parameter header.
4011746 Rev P 13
Chapter 1 Introduction
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Security Accounts table, tick
the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick
the check box of the last row.
The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
4 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the selected
Security Accounts are removed from the Security Accounts table.
Notes:
At least one Security Account belonging to the Administrators Security Group
must be present in the Security Accounts table.
When a Security Account is deleted from a Security Group while a user is logged
on to the DCM using this Security Account, the user has access to the DCM as
long as he is logged on.
14 4011746 Rev P
Web Browser User Interface Security
4011746 Rev P 15
Chapter 1 Introduction
16 4011746 Rev P
Licensing
Licensing
Introduction
Particular options of the DCM are license based; meaning licenses are required to use
these options. A number of these options are on a per license basis:
Each transrated or spliced service needs one or more licenses depending on the
definition of the service. The following table reflects the license consumption in
relation with the service definition.
Each service that must be scrambled or each service that contains components
that must be scrambled needs one Scrambling license.
Each incoming or outgoing Transport Stream for which forward error correction
is enabled consumes one FEC_COP3_CODEC license.
Each ASI Interface Card participating in a DTF/MTR application needs 1
DTF_CONCENTRATOR license. And for each ASI Interface Card for which the
encapsulated services must be scrambled, a DTF_SCRAMBLING license is
required.
For the DCM, Scientific Atlanta provides permanent licenses as well as temporary
licenses. Options with permanent license(s) can be used without time limitation
while the use of options with temporary license(s) is time limited.
Licenses for license based options are offered to the DCM using a license file. When
the DCM leaves Scientific Atlanta's assembly line, the device is provided with a
license file containing the licenses you ordered. If your DCM needs more licenses
than its license file provides, the licenses can be upgraded by installing a new license
file. The procedure to install a new license file can be found in sub topic Install a New
License File on page 19.
4011746 Rev P 17
Chapter 1 Introduction
Device Host ID: a unique identifier of the DCM that is used for creating new
license files
Type: represents the license type, for instance TRANSRATING.
Installed: represents the installation status of the option to which the license
belongs.
Count: represents the total number of licenses for this license type.
Usage: represents the number of licenses in use for this license type.
Expiration Date: represents the moment the temporary license(s) will
expired. Permanent licenses are indicated by 00-000-0000.
Remaining Time: for future use
Expired: represents the expired state of this license(s).
Key: represents the license key for this license(s).
18 4011746 Rev P
Licensing
4011746 Rev P 19
Chapter 1 Introduction
20 4011746 Rev P
Licensing
6 Simply drag-and-drop the license file into the Internet Explorer window.
Note: Once the new license file is copied to the device, it takes about 15 seconds
before the new licenses become active.
7 Close the Internet Explorer browser to end the FTP session.
4011746 Rev P 21
Chapter 1 Introduction
22 4011746 Rev P
Checking the Version Information
4011746 Rev P 23
Chapter 1 Introduction
24 4011746 Rev P
Importing and Exporting Device Settings
4011746 Rev P 25
Chapter 1 Introduction
5 Tick the check boxes of the settings that must be excluded during the importing
process.
Note: After setting are clearing Import Device Settings check boxes and pressing the
Apply command button, these settings (called Settings Backup's Own Settings) are
stored on the device. Each time configuration settings are imported into the DCM,
these Settings Backup's Own Settings will be used to determine the imported
configuration settings. To avoid overwriting the Settings Backup's Own Settings of the
device by these of the configuration file during the importing process, the Settings
Backup's Own Settings can be excluded by ticking the Exclude Settings Backup's Own
Settings check box.
6 Click on the Open command button.
Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and the file name appear in the
Import Device Settings from File box.
7 Click on the Import command button.
Result: A confirmation popup window is displayed.
26 4011746 Rev P
Importing and Exporting Device Settings
Result: After pressing the OK command button, the DCM will be rebooted.
WARNING:
During booting the DCM, the outgoing services will be interrupted.
Note: Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and the
features of the device.
4011746 Rev P 27
Chapter 1 Introduction
28 4011746 Rev P
Restarting the System
WARNING:
After restarting the DCM using a Cold Restart, all configuration settings will
be lost.
After restarting the DCM using a Warm Restart, the outgoing services will be
interrupted.
4 Press the Reboot command button.
Result: A confirmation popup window is displayed.
Warm Restart confirmation popup window
4011746 Rev P 29
Chapter 1 Introduction
30 4011746 Rev P
Using the Identify Me Utility
4011746 Rev P 31
2 Chapter 2
Configuration
Introduction
This chapter covers the configuration of the DCM. This chapter
provides the device configuration procedures, card configuration
procedures as well as port configuration procedures.
In This Chapter
Device Configuration ........................................................................... 34
Card Configuration .............................................................................. 55
ASI Port Configuration ........................................................................ 56
GbE Port Configuration ....................................................................... 64
Changing the Display Mode ............................................................... 92
4011746 Rev P 33
Chapter 2 Configuration
Device Configuration
Changing the Device Name
Introduction
To facilitate the identification of the DCM in an application, a name with maximum
40 characters can be given to the device.
Note: The name of the DCM appears in the title bar of the web browser.
Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box.
Clicking on an interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the
Configuration - Interface configuration sub page of the corresponding interface
card.
34 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
4011746 Rev P 35
Chapter 2 Configuration
3 In the Community String box, enter a community string for this trap destination.
4 Click on the Add command button to confirm.
36 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Trap destination is added
to the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.
Tip: To sort the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between the ascending and
descending order by clicking on the parameter header.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
4011746 Rev P 37
Chapter 2 Configuration
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the SNMP Trap Destination
Settings table, point to the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row.
3 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the Trap
destinations are removed from the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.
3 In the Write Community box, enter the community string for the modification
SNMP operations.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
38 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
4011746 Rev P 39
Chapter 2 Configuration
2 In the Power Up Activation drop down box in the System Settings table, select
Active to activate or select Inactive to deactivate the DCM after a reboot action of
the DCM.
3 In the Current Activation drop down box, select Active to activate or select
Inactive to deactivate the DCM.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
40 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
3 In the User Time box, enter the time and date using the following notation:
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss with:
YYYY: year
MM: month
4011746 Rev P 41
Chapter 2 Configuration
DD: day
hh: hour
mm: minutes
ss: seconds
4 In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.
Note: After changing the time zone and pressing the Apply command button, the
graphical user interface will be restarted and the message The User Interface is
restarting. This can take a minute. After the restart you will have to reconnect to the device.
appears. By pressing a link or command button after a while the Logon page will be
displayed. Log on as usual.
3 In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.
42 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
4 In the NTP Server IP Address box, enter the IP Address of the Time-Server and
press the Add Server To List command button. The octets of the IP address must
be separated by dots.
Result: The IP address of the Time-Server is added to the NTP Servers table.
Repeat this step for all Time-Servers that should be used for time synchronization.
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.
Note: Time-Servers can be removed from the NTP Servers table by ticking the check
box(es) in front of the corresponding IP Address(es) and pressing the Removed
Checked Items command button. To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the
NTP Servers table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
4011746 Rev P 43
Chapter 2 Configuration
Ref ID: identifies the time source to which the NTP server is synchronized.
.INIT. means that no response has been received so far.
Stratum: represents the level defining the distance from the reference clock.
A stratus 1 NTP server is directly linked to the reference clock. A stratus 2
NTP server is linked to a stratus 1 NTP server. A stratus 3 NTP server is
linked to a stratus 3 NTP server, etc... If a NTP server is not responding, the
value 16 is displayed.
REF Type: represents the NTP server type. The following values are used:
l : local
u : unicast
m : multicast
b : broadcast
Last Poll: represents the time that elapsed since the last poll attempt,
expressed in seconds.
Poll Int: represents the polling interval, expressed in seconds.
Reach: represents the reachability status of the NTP server. This is an 8-bit
octal number representing whether the NTP server responded during the last
eight poll attempts. When the value differs from 377, check the IP network.
Delay (ms): represents the packet roundtrip delay, expressed in milliseconds.
Offset (ms): the time offset expressed in milliseconds between the clock of the
DCM and the NTP server.
Jitter (ms): represents the time variation expressed in milliseconds between
the NTP servers and the DCM.
44 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
4011746 Rev P 45
Chapter 2 Configuration
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Adding an IP Alias
The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a management port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the Port drop down box in the Add New Alias table, select the port to which an
IP alias must be added.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
46 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
Removing IP Aliases
Perform the following procedure to remove an IP Alias from a management port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the IP Alias 10/100 Port or IP Alias GbE Port table, set the check box in the row
of the IP alias that must be removed.
4011746 Rev P 47
Chapter 2 Configuration
a In the Port selection box, select the 10/100 Port or GbE Port selection button.
b In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or
destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: Using an IP address in the range from 169.254.0.0 up to 169.254.255.255
is not allowed.
48 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
c In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network
(this parameter is not relevant when a host IP address is entered). The octets
of the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
d In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the
destination port. The octets of the Gateway must be separated by dots.
Notes:
Using the default gateway is not allowed.
The gateway must be in the same subnet of the selected interface.
e Press the Add command button.
Result: The new static route is added to the Static Route Settings table
Tip: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings table,
tick the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the last row that must be removed.
Result: All selected static route entries are removed from the Static Route Settings
table.
4011746 Rev P 49
Chapter 2 Configuration
Configuring IP Security
Introducing IP Security
IP security (IPsec) ensures secure communication by providing authentication and
encryption mechanisms for network traffic between two peers. IPsec can use several
different encryption and authentication mechanisms to accommodate various
implementations and security needs. To ensure that two peers use the same
protocols when communicating with each other, a policy is set up that defines a set of
security parameters and encryption algorithms that can be configured in each of both
peers.
The DCM allows setting up IPsec for both the 10/100 management port and GbE
management port separately.
Note:
Setting up IPsec for third party equipment (e.g. CA system) is not part of this
User's Guide. Please refer to the documentation that is shipped with the
equipment.
When the communication between the DCM and the computer running the web
browser user interface of the DCM must be secured by using IPsec, IPsec must
also be configured for this computer. The procedures to setup IPsec for a
computer running Windows can be found in appendix Configuring IPsec on
Windows on page 618.
Key Exchange
To establish an IPsec session, the peers need to exchange encryption keys in a secure
way. The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for this purpose. IKE is configured
to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. IKE will use 3DES encryption and
MD5/SHA1 hashing.
IPsec Packets
After a key is exchanged, the peers negotiate the structure of the IP packets. IPsec
modifies IP packets between the two peers by adding optional headers and
encrypting the data. Potentially, two headers can be used for this purpose: the
Authentication Header (AH) and the Encapsulated Security Payload Header (ESP).
To meet current requirements, however, the DCM uses only ESP; AH is not used.
When using ESP, two options ensure data integrity: the encryption algorithm (e.g.
3DES) and the hashing algorithm (e.g. MD5). The DCM is configured to accept a
number of ESP proposals, that is, a number of combinations of encryption and hashing
algorithms. Any combination of the following encryption protocols with the MD5
and SHA1 authentication protocol is accepted: AES 256, AES 128, 3DES, and NULL.
Note: To establish an IPsec session, the computer communicating with the DCM
must support at least one of the above combinations.
50 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
a In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the new IPsec peer. The octets of
the IP address must be separated by dots.
b In the Pre Shared key and Retype Pre Shared Key box, enter the pre shared
key for the new IPsec peer.
c Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The new IPsec peer is added to the IPsec Settings table
4011746 Rev P 51
Chapter 2 Configuration
3 In the IPsec Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each IPsec peer that
must be removed and press the Remove Checked Rows command button.
Tip: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IPsec Settings table, tick the
first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
last row that must be removed.
Result: All selected IPsec peers are removed from the IPsec Settings table.
Note: If IPsec is enabled, at least one IPsec peer must be present in the IPsec Settings
table. When all IPsec peers are ticked and the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only,
the following message appears in the Invalid User Input table on top of the
Configuration - System sub page.
Remove Checked Rows - Removing all IPsec settings when IPsec Traffic Only is active is not
allowed.
To deal with this, set the IPsec parameter to Allow All Traffic before removing all
peers.
52 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration
WARNING:
When the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only for the management port that is
used by the computer running the web browser user interface, and no valid IPsec
peer for this computer is added to the IPsec Settings table, the DCM becomes
inaccessible for this computer. This can be fixed by opening the web browser
user interface on a computer with valid IPsec peer or IPsec can be bypassed by
using the DCM hardware key. The procedure to bypass IPsec by using the
hardware key can be found in following topic.
3 In the row of the corresponding management port, select one of the following
settings in the IPsec drop down box.
IPsec Traffic Only
Allow All Traffic
Note: The IPsec drop down box is only applicable when IPsec peers are added to the
IPsec Settings table.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
4011746 Rev P 53
Chapter 2 Configuration
unassigning IPsec on the computer running the web browser user interface as
described in topic To Unassign IPSec on page 639.
Note: The DCM hardware key can be made by connecting pin 1 to pin 6 of the mating
field-wiring connector for this I/O connector.
I/O GbE
10/100 3 4
1 2
PS 1
PS 2
When IPsec is bypassed, the web browser user interface becomes accessible as a
device without IPsec and the IPsec configuration can be fixed. During this IPsec
bypassing process, a No IP SEC warning icon is displayed in the top pane of the web
browser user interface, see picture below.
Note: When the DCM hardware key is plugged in, the Hardware Key Inserted alarm is
active and a ROSA message can be generated.
54 4011746 Rev P
Card Configuration
Card Configuration
Changing the Name of an Interface Card
Introduction
Each interface card of the DCM can be labeled with a name. A logical card name will
facilitate the identification of the card in the web browser user interface.
4 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.
4011746 Rev P 55
Chapter 2 Configuration
6 7 8 9 10
1 2 3 4 5
When an input port is mirrored to one or multiple output ports, the mirror output
port(s) is (are) not visible in the DCM Outputs tree.
For more information concerning the DCM Inputs and Outputs tree, please refer to
topic Introducing the Services Trees on page 96.
Note: When a port is mirrored to a port, all settings for this mirror port and all
routings to this port are removed.
56 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration
Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter of a
mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page 61.
3 In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this input port. A
logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI input port in the web
browser user interface.
4 In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Input.
Result: When the Type parameter is set to Input, both the Packet Format and Output
Mode parameter are grayed out.
WARNING:
When the port type is changed, the related Transport Stream and service
settings are removed!
5 In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable
the ASI input port or Disabled to disable the port.
4011746 Rev P 57
Chapter 2 Configuration
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note:
- If the ASI connector is fed with a valid signal, the packet format (188 Bytes or
204 Bytes) of this incoming signal is displayed in the Packet Format box of the
ASI port, otherwise the packet format is indicated by Undefined.
- Changing an Input port to an Output port is not possible when services or
components of the port are passed to the output.
58 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration
Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter of a
mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page 61.
3 In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this output port. A
logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI output port in the web
browser user interface.
4 In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Output.
WARNING:
When the port type is changed, the related Transport Stream and service
settings are removed!
5 In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable
the ASI output port or Disabled to disable the port.
6 In the Packet Format drop down box, select 188 Bytes or 204 Bytes. When the
packet format is set to 204, 16 null bytes for Reed Solomon FEC bytes are added to
the outgoing packets.
4011746 Rev P 59
Chapter 2 Configuration
7 In the Output Mode drop down box, set the output mode of the outgoing ASI
stream to Byte (burst mode) or to Packet mode. This parameter is default set to
Byte.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
60 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration
3 In the Mirror of Port drop down box of the corresponding port, enter the port
number of the mirrored port.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note:
After pressing the Apply command button, all settings for this port and all
routings to this port are removed and the selected port is mirrored to this port.
With the exception of the Mirror of Port parameter, all port parameters of a
mirror port are not applicable.
Port mirroring can be disabled by setting the Mirror of Port parameter of the
mirror port to None.
4011746 Rev P 61
Chapter 2 Configuration
Perform the following steps to view the parameter overview of a particular ASI port.
1 On the web browser user browser interface of the DCM, point to the
Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, expand the interface card branch for which a
port must be checked.
3 Double click this port.
Result: The Configuration sub page of the port in question is displayed with the
following interface information.
62 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration
Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box. The corresponding ASI port is highlighted. Clicking on an
interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the Configuration -
Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the settings to configure the
corresponding port can directly be accessed by pressing the Configure Port
command button.
The Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by
right-clicking on the port in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.
4011746 Rev P 63
Chapter 2 Configuration
1 2 3 4
64 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
Filtering parameter
As described in topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 68, UDP packets are
filtered using the destination UDP port number. All UDP packets for which the
destination UDP port number is greater than the GbE UDP boundary setting
parameter are considered as MPEG data packets. A second filtering on these MPEG
data packets is by default done by using IP address filtering. All UDP packets for
which the destination IP address matches the IP address of the GbE port will be
processed. For certain reasons, e.g. IP aliasing, this second MPEG data packet
filtering must be done by using MAC address filtering. All MPEG data packets for
which the MAC address matches the MAC address of the GbE port will be processed.
The following filters can be used:
4011746 Rev P 65
Chapter 2 Configuration
The following procedure explains how to change the interface parameters of a GbE
port.
WARNING:
After changing network settings of a GbE port, the routes will be removed and
should be reapplied.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
GbE port interface parameters must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the GbE Name and Network Settings table:
66 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
4011746 Rev P 67
Chapter 2 Configuration
a In the Enable drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled or
Disabled.
b In the Disable Mode drop down box, select Port Only or Full Link.
c In the Mirroring drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled or
Disabled.
d In the Output Streaming drop down box of the port pair in question, select
one of the following values: On, Off, or Auto.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
68 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Perform the following steps to view the Info sub page of a particular GbE port.
1 On the web browser user browser interface of the DCM, point to the
Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, expand the interface card branch for which a
port must be checked.
3 Double click on this port.
Result: The Configuration page of the port in question is displayed with the
following interface parameters:
Number: port number
Name: port name
Type
State: state of the port pair to which this port belongs
4011746 Rev P 69
Chapter 2 Configuration
Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box. The corresponding GbE port is highlighted. Clicking on an
interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the Configuration -
Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card to which the
port belongs can be accessed by pressing the Configure Port command button.
The Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by
right-clicking on the port in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.
70 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
LAN
Scientific Scientific
Atlanta Atlanta
Alarm
Model D9900 Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Digital Content
PS 1 Manager (DCM) PS 1 Manager (DCM)
PS 2 PS 2
Before the DCM starts streaming to a device with a particular IP address, it starts the
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to identify the MAC address of this device by
broadcasting an ARP request message and receiving an ARP reply message, which
contains the MAC address, from the device.
When a DCM is integrated into a unidirectional application, the system is not able to
receive ARP reply messages after broadcasting ARP request messages. To deal with
this the MAC address can manually be mapped to the IP address by adding a static
ARP table entry.
Note: Static ARP combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static ARP is
required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed.
Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port.
More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in
topic Configuring VLAN on page 77.
4011746 Rev P 71
Chapter 2 Configuration
4 In the Add New Static ARP Entry table, tick the Port check box(s) of the port(s)
for which a static ARP entry must be added.
5 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address. The octets of the IP address must be
separated by dots.
6 In the MAC address box, enter the MAC address associated with the entered IP
address. The octets of the MAC address must be separated by colons.
7 Click on the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Static ARP entry is added
to the Static ARP Settings table.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static ARP Settings table, tick
the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
check box of the last row.
72 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: The selected entry (entries) is (are) removed from the Static ARP Settings
table.
4011746 Rev P 73
Chapter 2 Configuration
LAN 1 LAN 2
Scientific Scientific
Atlanta Atlanta
Alarm
Model D9900 Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Digital Content
PS 1 Manager (DCM) PS 1 Manager (DCM)
PS 2 PS 2
In the illustration above DCM A requires the knowledge of the router port that
participates into the subnet of the DCM and the IP settings of LAN 2 of DCM B.
Note: Static Routes combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static route is
required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed.
Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port.
More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in
topic Configuring VLAN on page 77.
74 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
5 Tick the Default Gateway check box if a direct reachable IP router is used.
Note: When the Default Gateway check box is set, both the IP address and the Subnet
Mask parameter are not applicable.
6 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or
destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
7 In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network (when
a host IP address is entered, this parameter is not relevant). The octets of the
Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
8 In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the
destination port. The octets of the Gateway must be separated by dots.
9 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Static Route entry is added
to the Static Route Settings table.
4011746 Rev P 75
Chapter 2 Configuration
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings table,
point to the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the selected
route entry (entries) will be removed from the Static Route Setting table.
76 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
Configuring VLAN
Introduction
About Virtual Local Area Network
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network configuration in which devices
communicate using Local Area Network (LAN) protocols as if they were the same
physical LAN, but where they are in fact on physical separate LAN. Broadcast and
other LAN traffic remains within the LAN.
Software masks the physical topology of the devices and provides a logical topology,
which is more suitable to the users requirements.
Remark
When a VLAN port pair is defined:
the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream coming from the
corresponding VLAN must match the IP address of the VLAN port pair.
the filtering of the GbE ports must be set to MAC only or Disabled and not the
default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can be found in
topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.
Notes
The DCM with software version 5.1 supports:
- VLAN tagging of outgoing Transport Stream packets
- VLAN Tagging of IGMP packets
- VLAN tagging of dynamic ARP packets (both request and replies)
- The source IP address of a VLAN tagged outgoing Transport Stream is the IP
address of the VLAN port. If no such port exists, the IP address of the GbE
port (physical port) is used.
The following list describes the VLAN functionality of the DCM:
Streaming different Transport Streams with same destination multicast IP
address and same UDP port, and different VLAN ID is not allowed.
Receiving multicast Transport Streams on the same GbE port with identical IP
address/UDP port from two different VLANs is not possible.
Receiving unicast Transport Streams on the same GbE port with identical UDP
port from two different VLANs is not possible.
4011746 Rev P 77
Chapter 2 Configuration
a In the Port Pair selection box, point to the port pair for which a VLAN port
pair must be added.
b In the VLAN ID box, enter a unique VLAN identifier for the corresponding
VLAN port pair. A VLAN ID in the range from 1 up to 4094 can be used.
c In the First IP Address box, enter an IP address for the first port in the port
pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
d In the First Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the first port in the
port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.
e In the Second IP Address box, enter an IP address for the second port in the
port pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: The IP addresses of both ports must not be in use by a GbE port,
another VLAN port pair, or IP aliasing.
78 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
f In the Second Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the second port in
the port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.
g Click on the Add command button.
Result: The VLAN port pair is added to the VLAN Settings table.
Note: The number of VLAN port pairs is limited to 118/GbE Interface Card.
Tips:
To sort the VLAN Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows, tick the check box of the first row,
press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected row(s) is (are) removed from the VLAN Settings table.
Note: When a VLAN port is in use (e.g. if an IGMP Multicast Group with
corresponding VLAN ID is joined) the port pair can not be removed.
4011746 Rev P 79
Chapter 2 Configuration
a In the Port Pair selection box, select the Port Pair selection button of the port
pair that should be added to the Multicast Group.
b In the Available VLAN IDs drop down box, select the VLAN ID
corresponding the VLAN port pair. Select None to choose the native GbE port
pair (without VLAN tags).
c In the Multicast IP Address box enter the IP address of the multicast group.
The octets of the multicast IP address must be separated by dots.
80 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
Notes:
The source filtering can always be adapted by changing the filter parameters and
pressing the Join command button.
When no source IP addresses must be specified, select Exclude in the Filter drop
down box without specifying source IP addresses.
In an IGMPv2 environment the Filter parameter must be set to Exclude.
4011746 Rev P 81
Chapter 2 Configuration
When the network between a router and the DCM (using IGMPv3) is populated
with snooping switches supporting IGMPv2, the Unsolicited IGMP Message
parameter must be set to IGMPv2.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IGMP Settings table, point to
the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and point to the
check box of the last row.
5 Press the Leave Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Leave Checked Items command button, the entries are
removed from the IGMP Settings table.
82 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
4011746 Rev P 83
Chapter 2 Configuration
Gateway Resolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and the
DCM receive an ARP reply message from the router to this subnet.
Gateway Unresolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and
the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from the router after
broadcasting ARP request messages.
Destination has Static ARP: the static ARP entry is used for the route to the
destination device (same subnet) or to the router (different subnet).
Multicast
Not Applicable
Tip: To sort the Destinations Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the parameter header.
84 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
4011746 Rev P 85
Chapter 2 Configuration
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Adding an IP Alias
The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a GbE port on a GbE
Interface Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card
containing the GbE port for which the IP aliases must be added.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 In the Port drop down box in the Add New Alias table, select the port to which an
IP alias must be added.
4 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
5 Press the Add Row command button to confirm.
Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias Port table.
86 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
Result: When an IP alias is added to a port, the IP Address and Subnet Mask
parameter of this port becomes inapplicable.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Removing IP Aliases
Perform the following procedure to remove an IP alias from a management port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card
containing the GbE port for which the IP aliases must be removed.
3 In the IP Alias Port table of the corresponding port, set the check box in the row
of the IP alias that must be removed.
4011746 Rev P 87
Chapter 2 Configuration
- Total frames received: the total number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port
- Broadcast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the
corresponding port and which were directed to the broadcast address
- Multicast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the
corresponding port and which are directed to a multicast address
- Control frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with the
special Control Frame ID
88 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
4011746 Rev P 89
Chapter 2 Configuration
90 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration
- Total Bytes received: the total number of bytes received by the corresponding
port
- Total Bytes transmitted: the total number of bytes transmitted by the
corresponding port
4011746 Rev P 91
Chapter 2 Configuration
4 In the Display Mode box, select Decimal or Hex in the drop down box of the
identifier in question.
92 4011746 Rev P
Changing the Display Mode
5 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
To Change the Display Mode of Private Data and Generated EMM PIDs
The following procedure explains how to change the display mode for Private Data
and generated EMMs 1.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 Point to the Defaults Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
3 In the Input Gen. EMM and Private Data PIDs drop down box, select Decimal or
Hex.
4 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
4011746 Rev P 93
3 Chapter 3
Multiplexing
Introduction
This chapter outlines the re-multiplexing capabilities of the Digital
Content Manager (DCM).
In This Chapter
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services ....................................... 96
Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams . 118
Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams .............. 127
Forward Error Correction.................................................................. 155
Service Re-Multiplexing..................................................................... 176
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components .......................... 185
Modifying PSI/SI Information.......................................................... 246
Changing Service Parameters ........................................................... 272
Activating or Stopping Streaming.................................................... 282
Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams .................. 285
Viewing Service Grooming ............................................................... 290
4011746 Rev P 95
Chapter 3 Multiplexing
The DCM Inputs tree as well as the DCM Outputs tree can automatically be refreshed
at regular time. When the Tree View sub page is opened, the trees are refreshed with
the rate as defined in the Input Tree Refresh Rate and Output Tree Refresh rate
parameter on the Configuration - Default Settings sub page. The procedure to
change these parameters can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
96 4011746 Rev P
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services
The refresh rates can also be changed using the refresh ( ) drop down box on the
Tree View sub page. These settings are only temporary and will be changed to its
defaults as soon as the Tree View sub page is left. A refresh rate of 30 second, 1
minute, and 5 minutes can be chosen.
The trees can also be refreshed manually by clicking the corresponding Reload
command button or by right-clicking in the corresponding tree pane and pointing to
Reload in the short-cut menu.
In a tree, each branch is provided with particular information concerning the branch.
The following topics describe the different branch types.
Card Branch
The illustration below explains a card branch.
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a card branch.
Indication Description
Icon of a interface card
Notes:
When an interface card is equipped with a Co-Processor and/or FEC Card (GbE
Interface Card only) Co-proc and/or FEC appears in the Card branch of the DCM
Inputs, DCM Outputs, and DCM Configuration tree.
When the Statmux Controller function of a GbE Interface Card is enabled,
Statmux appears beside the interface card type.
Right-clicking on a card branch displays a short-cut menu to perform following
actions:
- Reloading the settings for the selected interface card.
- Displaying the Configuration - Interface sub page for the selected interface
card.
4011746 Rev P 97
Chapter 3 Multiplexing
Port Branch
The illustration below explains a port branch.
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a port branch.
Indication Description
Icon of an enabled input port
Notes:
A GbE port is labeled with the port names of the port pair. The black colored port
name indicates the active port and the gray colored port name the inactive port.
Active Inactive
port port
For information about active and inactive ports, please refer to topic Configuring the
GbE Port Backup Parameters on page 464.
When an ASI port is mirrored to one of more output ports, these ports are
combined into one branch, see illustration below.
More information concerning port ASI port mirroring can be found in topic ASI Port
Configuration on page 56.
98 4011746 Rev P
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services
Right-clicking on a port branch in the DCM Inputs tree displays a short-cut menu
to perform following actions:
- Reloading the settings for the selected port.
- Displaying the Configuration sub page for the selected port.
- Displaying the Service - Services sub page for the selected port.
Right-clicking on a port branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a short-cut menu
to perform following actions:
- Displaying the Service - TS Output sub page for the selected port.
- Reloading the settings for the selected port.
- Starting or stopping streaming of all outgoing Transport Streams on the
selected port.
- Displaying the Configuration sub page for the selected port.
The illustration below explains a Transport Stream branch on a GbE Interface Card.
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a Transport Stream
branch.
Indication Description
Icon of a Multi Program Transport Stream (MPTS)
DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an MPTS for which services are passed from the
input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an MPTS for which services are missing at the
input
Icon of an MPTS with alarm indication
4011746 Rev P 99
Chapter 3 Multiplexing
Indication Description
Icon of a non-streaming MPTS
DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS for which the service is passed from the
input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS for which the service is missing at the
input
Icon of a Single Program Transport Stream with alarm indication
Icon of a non-streaming SPTS for which the service is missing at the input
DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication for which the
service is passed from the input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication for which the
service is missing at the input
Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service
DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service for which
the service is passed from the input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication containing a
scrambled service for which the service is missing at the input
Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service with alarm indication
Tips:
A pink colored name of an SPTS indicates an SPTS with merged service(s). More
information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging
Components on page 190.
(RTP) in the branch of an Outgoing Transport Stream indicates that the packets in
which the Transport Stream is encapsulated, are enlarged with an RTP Header.
For more information, please refer to topic Changing Settings of Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 141.
(FEC) in the branch indicates a Transport Stream for which Forward Error
Correction (FEC) is enabled. For more information concerning FEC, please refer
to topic Forward Error Correction on page 155.
- Displaying the Service - TS Output sub page for the selected Transport
Stream.
- Transforming (Undo Loop Through) a transparent loop through Transport
Stream on an ASI Interface card into a standard Transport Stream. On a GbE
Card, this action removes the transparent loop through transport stream.
- Deleting the selected Transport Stream (GbE Interface Card).
- Removing all services from the selected Transport Stream.
- Activating or stopping streaming of the selected Transport Stream.
- Opening the TS Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected Transport Stream.
- For an SPTS, finding the source in the DCM Inputs tree.
- For an SPTS, finding the active source (= not in backup state) in the DCM
Inputs tree.
Note: Right-clicking on a Statmux Pool branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a
short-cut menu to view the Statmux pool settings and the Statmux settings of the
associated encoders.
Service branch
The illustration below explains a service branch.
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a service branch.
Indication Description
Icon of a service
Icon of a service at the output for which the service is missing at the input.
Icon of a preconfigured service for which the service is not yet or no longer
available at the input.
Icon of a service at the output for which the service is missing at the input
and with alarm indication. Icon of a preconfigured service for which the
service is not yet or no longer available at the input and with alarm
indication.
Icon of a scrambled service
Indication Description
Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication
Icon of a scrambled service at the output for which the service is missing at
the input
Icon of a scrambled service at the output for which the service is missing at
the input with alarm indication
Tips:
A pink colored service name indicates a service with merged service(s). More
information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging
Components on page 190.
A service in backup state is indicated by an exclamation mark.
Right-clicking on a service branch in the DCM Inputs tree displays a short-cut
menu to perform following action:
- Locating a passed service in the DCM Outputs tree, see topic Locating a Passed
Service in the DCM Outputs Tree on page 117.
Right-clicking on a service branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a short-cut
menu to perform following actions:
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a Transrating Group
branch.
Indication Description
Icon of a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group
Tips:
Right-clicking on a Transrating Group branch displays a short-cut menu to
perform following actions:
- Displaying the Service - Transrater sub page of the selected Transrating
Group.
- Deleting the selected Transrating Group.
- Displaying the Service - Comparison sub page of the selected Transrating
Group.
The alarm indication for Transport Stream or Transport Stream content will be
propagated to the Transrating Group branch by using a red colored icon.
More information about Transrating can be found in chapter Transrating on page
295.
Component Branch
The illustration below explains a branch of an incoming component.
Notes:
Each incoming Transport Stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node
containing the incoming EMM components and a Unreferenced PIDs main node
containing the unreferenced components.
Each outgoing Transport Stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node
containing the passed EMM components, an Unreferenced PIDs main node
containing the passed unreferenced components.
An empty main node is indicated by (None available).
Components with PID lower then 32 in an incoming Transport Stream without
PAT are also considered as unreferenced components next to all others and
accommodated into the Unreferenced PIDs main node. When a PAT is present,
unreferenced components will only be shown if equal to or greater than 32.
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a component branch.
Indication Description
Icon of an Elementary Stream
Indication Description
Icon of the EMM PIDs main node
General Remarks
With the exception of the component branches, each branch is provided with bit
rates figures. These figures appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside the
branch. More information concerning these bit rates figures can be found in
chapter Checking Bit Rates on page 537.
The order of the services and GbE Transport Streams can be changed. More
information about changing the order in the trees can be found in topic Changing
Tree Settings on page 107.
- Service Name
- Service ID
Input Tree Refresh Rate and Output Tree Refresh Rate parameter
The DCM Inputs tree and DCM Outputs tree can automatically be refreshed at
regular time. The refresh rates of these actions are by default disabled and can be
set to 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 5 minutes.
Removal Warning in Tree parameter
Using the short-cut menu on the DCM Outputs tree is quite easy. To protect the
application from for instance accidentally removing of Transport Streams, an
additional confirmation can be asked before the action will be executed. For
certain reasons, for instance during reconfiguration actions, it can be useful to
disable this feature. When this feature is enabled, an additional confirmation will
be given for the following actions:
- Stopping Transport Stream streaming
- Removing Transport Streams
- Removing services
- Removing Transrating Groups
Note: This feature do not apply to tab pages with Apply All command button.
2 In the Sort GbE TS in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following settings
to sort the Transport Streams in the DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs tree:
IP Address
ON ID
TS ID
UDP Port
3 In the Sort Services in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following
settings to sort the services in DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs tree:
Service Name
Service ID
4 In the Removal Warning in Tree parameter, select Enabled to switch on the
confirmation feature or Disabled to switch off this feature.
5 In the Drop on SPTS: desired action drop down box, select one of the following
settings:
Always Add to TS: during a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing
SPTS, the service will be added to the Transport Stream.
Ask for Service Merge or TS Add: during a drag and drop action of a service to
an outgoing SPTS, a message box appears asking for a service merge or a
Transport Stream add.
6 In the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action drop down box, select one of the
following settings:
Create TS and Pass All Services: during dragging and dropping an incoming
Transport Stream to a GbE port, an outgoing Transport Stream containing all
input services will be created.
Ask for Desired Action: during dragging and dropping an incoming Transport
Stream to a GbE port, a dialog will be displayed asking the desired action.
7 In the Menu appearance drop down box, select one of the following items:
2 stage: two clicks & Go: the sub links appear only after pointing to the main link.
Floating: one click & Go: the sub links appear after pausing the cursor on or after
pointing to the main link.
8 In the Input Tree Refresh Rate and Output Tree Refresh Rate drop down box,
select the desired refresh rate.
9 In the Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change drop down box, select Enabled
or Disabled.
10 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: To sort the Input Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
Press the OK command button to restart the search action from the top of the
tree or press the Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note: To locate the active service in a service backup application, right-click on the
service and point to Find Active Source in the short-cut menu.
4 Click on the Highlight Destination arrow to highlight the service in the DCM
Outputs tree.
Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Incoming Transport
Stream
The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings
table containing all services of a particular incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service Link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream containing the
services for which settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this incoming Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport
Stream and point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page containing the Service Settings table of the
selected Transport Stream is displayed.
Note: Each service in the Service Settings table is prefixed by its service identifier
and service name.
5 Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A
name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are
not allowed.
Tip: When no SDTa is available, the user name will be used by the web browser user
interface to identify the service. For more information, please refer to topic Changing
SDT Settings for a Particular Service on page 263.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: Each service in the Service Settings table is prefixed by the destination IP
Address and UDP port number of the incoming Transport Stream (GbE port only) to
which the service belongs to and the service identifier and service name.
4 Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A
name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are
not allowed.
Tip: When no SDTa is available, the user name will be used by the web browser user
interface to identify the service.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Stream type 0x01 (1) 0x02 (2) 0x03 (3) 0x04 (4) 0x06 (6) 0x80 (128) 0x81 (129)
Mode
DVB Video Video Audio Audio Res Res
For particular digital processes, e.g. Transrating or DPI, the DCM requires the
knowledge of this component type - stream_type association, therefore the standard
must be given for each incoming Transport Stream.
The Input Standard mode for incoming Transport Streams is default set to DVB.
When most of the incoming Transport Streams are compliant with another standard,
it is useful to change this default value.
Remark:
The DCM cannot handle incoming VBR MPTS GBE streams.
Tip: The corresponding incoming Transport Stream is identified by its ON_ID and
TS_ID.
4 In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard mode:
DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets.
5 In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired
mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets.
6 In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one
of the following values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets.
7 When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR, enter the SID of the
service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box (GbE Interface Card
only).
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: The incoming Transport Streams of the selected port are identified by IP Address
and UDP port number.
a In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard
mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
b In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
c In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following values:
Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
d When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR, enter the SID of
the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
a In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is
a multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream in the IP
Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP Port box.
c In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard
mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
d Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
e In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
f In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following values:
Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
g When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR, enter the SID
of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box.
h Press the Add command button to confirm.
Result: The preconfigured Transport Stream is added to the TS Settings table.
Note: Adding a preconfigured incoming Transport Stream with Input Standard,
Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor, and Time Base Selection parameter set to
Default (xxxxx) is not possible.
Tip: As long as a preconfigured incoming Transport Stream do not match an
incoming Transport Stream, the preconfigured Transport Stream can be removed by
ticking the check box of the corresponding entry and pointing to the Remove
Checked Items command button.
WARNING:
Changing default values involves changing the associated parameter for all
incoming transport streams for which the value is set to default.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default standard mode for incoming Transport Streams should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Point to the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page containing is displayed.
a In the Input Standard drop down box in the TS Default Settings table, select
the desired value: DVB, ATSC, or DC-II.
b In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired value: Enabled or Disabled.
c In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select
the desired value: Auto or Auto Referenced PCR.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
General
Before services can be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, the output port must
be provided with one or more outgoing Transport Streams. Since an ASI output port
only has one Transport Stream, each ASI port is by default provided with one
Transport Stream with default settings. In contrast with the ASI output ports, the
GbE ports accept multiple Transport Streams.
During the Transport Stream creation process particular parameters are filled with
default values. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic
Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 146.
Once outgoing Transport Streams are created, the corresponding parameters can be
changed as described in topic Changing Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams on page
141.
WARNING:
We strongly advise against performing processing like forcing PIDs, PID
remapping, passing components or services from other incoming Transport
Streams, DPI, scrambling, etc..., on the content of outgoing Transport Streams
with Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule assignment without the knowledge of the
packet identifiers of the unreferenced components that can be added to the
corresponding incoming Transport Stream. Otherwise conflicts between
unreferenced components passed from the input and components present at the
output can arise resulting in CC errors.
TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned during the creation of an outgoing
Transport stream by passing an incoming Transport Stream to a port. TS auto pass
rules can also be assigned to an existing outgoing Transport Stream. When TS auto
pass rules are automatically created during the Transport Stream creation process,
the rules automatically refer to the passed incoming Transport Stream.
The PSI/SI information of the outgoing Transport Stream to which TS auto pass rules
are assigned, is by default regenerated by the DCM (Output mode set to Generate).
The procedure to change this mode is described in topic Changing the PSI/SI
Generation Mode on page 250.
Notes:
When services or EMMs are removed from the input, their nodes are indicated by
their not-present icon and configuration settings are kept. Removing these nodes
must be done manually.
When unreferenced components are removed, all references at the output will be
removed.
When services are automatically passed to an outgoing Transport Stream with
Pass Service rule assignment and services, which are still present at the input, are
manually removed from the outgoing Transport stream, these services will be
passed again when the service population of the incoming Transport Stream
changes.
When services are automatically added to an incoming Transport Stream that is
passed with Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing Transport Stream
containing a MPTS - all Services Transrating Group, the services will automatically
be added to the Transrating Group. These new services will get default
configuration settings.
When services are added to an incoming Transport Stream that is passed with
Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing Transport Stream containing one or
more Selective Services Transrating Group, the services will not be added to a
Transrating Group.
Notes:
A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning
the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the
same as at the input.
Incoming Transport Streams without PAT can transparently be passed.
When an incoming Transport Stream with errors is transparently passed to the
output, these errors will also be present in the outgoing Transport Stream.
The packet format of an outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI port is 188 bytes
with output mode set to Packet, independent of the packet format of the incoming
Transport Stream
Tip: To protect the content of Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream,
Transport Stream backup is possible. For more information about Transport Stream
backup, please refer to topic Transport Stream Backup on page 474.
General Notes
During the Transport Stream creation process to a GbE port an IP address must be
assigned. Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has the
following restrictions.
For SSM, use address from the range 232.0.0.0 - 232.255.255.255.
Exception: addresses 232.0.0.0 ... 232.0.0.255 are reserved.
For ASM, use address from the range 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.
Exception: addresses 239.0.0.0 ... 239.191.255.255 are reserved.
Streaming MPEG data packets to addresses in the range 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255 is
strongly discouraged because this may cause trouble on e.g. routers.
For more information please refer to RFC 3171 or to Cisco's Guidelines for Enterprise IP
Multicast Address Allocation.
a Enter the Original Network Identifier for the new Transport Stream in the ON
ID box and the Transport Stream Identifier in the TS ID box.
Tip: Both the ON ID and the TS ID can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal
value must be prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display
mode, please refer to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
b In the Output Standard drop down box, select the desired output standard
mode.
Transparent
Force Uplink
Force Video
Force Audio3
c In the Streaming drop down box, select Active to enable streaming and
Stopped to disable streaming of the Transport Stream through the output port.
d Clear the Use Default Settings check box to fill the following parameters
manually or tick this check box to fill these parameters by defaults.
IP Address parameter
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has
some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on
page 127.
UDP Port parameter
Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter
Output Protocol parameter
Output Rate parameter
Tip: Filling these parameters by defaults reduces the number of parameter
adaptations during the Transport Stream adding process. The procedure to
change these defaults can be found in Changing Default Values for Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 146.
e Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button the new created Transport Stream is
added to the TS Settings table.
Tips:
The Sum of CBR TS box below the TS Settings table indicates the sum of the bit
rates of the outgoing constant bit rate Transport Streams on the selected port and
the Active Sum box the sum of the bit rates of the outgoing transport streams for
which streaming is active.
For more information concerning the Transport Stream parameters, please refer
to topic Changing Standard Settings of an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 141.
To a GbE port
An outgoing Transport Stream for a GbE port can be created by passing an incoming
Transport Stream to this port. All services of the incoming Transport Stream are
automatically passed to this outgoing Transport Stream. When auto pass rules must
be assigned to the outgoing Transport Stream during the Transport Stream creation
process, the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to Ask for the
Desired Action. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Tree Settings on
page 107.
Note: Only services within the incoming Transport Stream will be passed to the
output when no TS auto rules are assigned to the new created Transport Stream, no
EMMs or unreferenced components.
The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing Transport Stream for
a GbE port by dragging and dropping an incoming Transport Stream to this port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing
Transport Stream must be created.
4 Select the icon of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the GbE port.
Result: When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask for the
Desired Action, the following dialog is displayed.
Select the Create TS and Pass all Services to create an outgoing Transport Stream
containing all services of the passed incoming Transport Stream or select
Activate Automatic Pass Rules to assign auto pass rules to the outgoing
Transport Stream. Once the selection is made, press the OK command button
to confirm or the cancel command button to abort the operation.
Result: An outgoing Transport Stream is created populated with the services of the
passed incoming Transport Stream. When auto pass rules are assigned, the
unreferenced components and EMMs are also passed and the ON ID and the TS ID of
the new created outgoing Transport Stream match the IDs of the passed incoming
Transport Stream. A number of parameters are filled with the defaults as defined on
the Default Settings sub page of the GbE Configuration page. More information
concerning these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 146.
Note:
The Streaming parameter of the new created outgoing Transport Stream is set to
Stopped, meaning that the Transport Stream is not streamed through the GbE port.
The procedure to enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping
Streaming on page 282.
Individual components (EMMs and unreferenced components) can be passed,
blocked, and if needed remapped manually; more information concerning
passing and remapping of unreferenced components can be found in topic
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.
To an ASI port
An ASI port can only be populated with one outgoing Transport Stream. When an
incoming Transport Stream is dropped to an ASI port, the existing outgoing
Transport Stream will be replaced by the dropped Transport Stream. The new
created outgoing Transport Stream is automatically labeled with the ON ID and TS
ID of the incoming Transport Stream and assigned with TS auto pass rules. All
components within this incoming Transport Stream are passed to the outgoing
Transport Stream, including the unreferenced component.
The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing Transport Stream for
an ASI port by dragging and dropping an incoming Transport Stream to this port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the ASI port for which the outgoing
Transport Stream must be created.
4 Select the icon of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the ASI port.
5 Select the Activate Automatic Pass rules selection button and press the OK
command button to confirm or the cancel command button to abort the
operation.
Result: After pressing the OK command button, the following confirmation box is
displayed asking to replace the existing outgoing Transport Stream.
Introduction
Single Program Transport Streams (SPTSs) can be created by passing individual
services of incoming Transport Streams to a GbE port. Two methods can be used, viz.
the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method. The Drag and Drop method is
useful when a discreet number of SPTSs must be created. The Muxing method is
recommended if a large number of SPTSs should be created.
A number of parameters of the new created SPTSs are filled with the defaults. The
procedure to define these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for
Outgoing Transport Streams on page 146.
The Streaming parameter of the new created SPTSs is set to Stopped, meaning that
new created outgoing SPTSs do not stream through the GbE port. The procedure to
enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 282.
Muxing Method
The following steps explain how to create SPTSs on a GbE port using the Muxing
method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box GbE
Port (SPTS).
Result: The Input Services and Output GbE Ports tables are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output GbE Ports table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services for which outgoing
SPTSs must be created.
4 In the Output GbE Port table, set the check box(es) of the GbE port(s) on which
the outgoing SPTSs must be created.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
GbE Ports table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the SPTSs are created. All check
boxes in the Input Services table as well as the check boxes in the Output GbE Ports
table will be cleared.
Note: The picture above is the dialog that appears if the incoming Transport Stream is
dropped on a GbE port. The dialog that appears if the Transport Stream is dropped
to an ASI port is similar.
5 Select the Pass the TS Transparently selection button and press the OK
command button.
Note: When the transport stream is dropped to an ASI port, the following
confirmation box is displayed.
UDP Port: UDP port number of the destination port to which the outgoing
Transport Stream must stream
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier (ON ID) labels the outgoing Transport
Stream with the source network of the Transport Stream.
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID) is used to identify the outgoing
Transport Stream from other Transport Streams in the application.
Total Bit Rate (Mbps): The maximum bit rate that can be used by the
corresponding Transport Stream. This parameter is not applicable if the Output
Rate parameter is set to VBR.
Output Standard: the service type coding used by particular set top boxes differs
according to the standard. Therefore the DCM allows remapping of the PMT
elementary stream_type by changing the Output Standard mode. The following
table gives the PMT Elementary Stream_Type remapping possibilities.
Stream Type Remapping
Component Type Video 1st Audio 2nd Audio 3rd Audio 4th Audio
Mode
- The RTP standard requires that an even UDP port number is chosen for an
RTP stream..
- For forward error correction (FEC) the Output Protocol parameter must be set
to RTP. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward
Error Correction on page 155.
Tip: In the DCM Output tree an outgoing Transport Stream of which the Output
Protocol parameter is set to RTP, is indicated by (RTP).
Tip: Pressing the arrow beside Configure TOT displays the Service - SI Table - TOT
sub page that can be used to configure the TOT table for the corresponding Transport
Stream. For more information, please refer to topic Adding or Removing Time Offset
Descriptors to or from a TOT on page 267.
Notes:
Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has some
restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 127.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream, the TS tab page also provides
references of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.
1 In the Update all TS table, enter the desired value in the box or select the desired
value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.
- Source UDP Port parameter: the source UDP port for the outgoing Transport
Stream.
- Increment Scheme parameter: When a Transport Stream is added to a GbE
port, the destination IP settings are adapted using one of the following
increment schemes:
IP Address + 1: the default IP address for the new created Transport Stream
is equal to the IP address as defined in the Start IP Address parameter
and each time increased by one if occupied.
UDP Port + 1: the UDP port for the new created Transport Stream is equal
to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port parameter and
each time increased by one if occupied.
UDP Port + 2: the UDP port for the new created Transport Stream is equal
to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port parameter and
each time increased by two if occupied.
IP Address + 1 and UDP Port + 1: the IP address and UDP port for the new
created Transport Stream is equal to the IP address and UDP port as
defines in the Start IP Address and Start UDP Port parameter and each
time increased by one if occupied.
- Output Protocol parameter
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter
Output Standard parameter
SI Table Playout parameters: for more information, please refer to topic Changing
the PSI/SI Table Playout Rate on page 255.
PMT Descriptor Rules: for more information, please refer to topic Adding and
Modifying PMT Descriptors on page 235.
The following procedure explains how to change the default outgoing Transport
Stream settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default values for the outgoing Transport Stream parameters should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page is displayed.
Note: For an ASI Interface Card, only the Standard parameter is applicable.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Type of Service
The Type of Service parameter (ToS) determines the IP packet header field that
indicates the type or quality of the service for this IP packet. A value can be given
between 0 and 255 and is default set to 0.
Time to Live
To prevent indefinite looping of IP packets in a network, the lifetime of IP packets can
be limited by defining a time to live to these packets. This time to live parameter
(TTL) determines a field in IP packet header that specifies how many routers a packet
can pass before being discarded. Each time an IP packet passes a router, the TTL field
of the packet is decreased by one and will be discarded if it reaches 0. A value can be
given between 1 and 255 and is default set to 64.
Note: During the outgoing Transport Stream creation process particular advanced
Transport Stream setting are automatically filled by default values. The procedure to
change these default values is described in topic Changing Default Values for the
Advanced Transport Stream Settings on page 152.
Result: The Advanced tab page containing the Advanced Settings table is displayed.
5 In the Advanced Settings table, perform the following steps to change VLAN
settings:
a Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing Transport Stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN
On check box is ticked.
6 In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.
7 In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
8 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
To Change the Advanced Settings for Multiple Transport Stream of a Particular Port
The procedure below describes how to change the advanced setting of multiple
outgoing transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port for which advanced parameters of
multiple Transport Streams must be changed.
3 Double-click on the port or right-click on the port and point to View Port Settings
in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Advanced link.
5 Result: The Service - TS Advanced sub page is displayed.
6 In the Advanced Settings table, perform the following steps:
Tip: In the Advanced Setting table, each outgoing Transport Stream is indicated (TS
identification) by source IP address, UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.
a Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing Transport Stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN
On check box is ticked.
d In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.
e In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
7 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Note: When particular parameters of all Transport Streams in the Advanced Settings
table must be changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser
user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use this
function.
1 In the Update all TS table, set or clear the VLAN Enabled check box and enter
the desired value in the box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.
Note: The ID and Priority boxes are only applicable when the VLAN Enabled check
box is ticked.
2 Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the TS Settings table.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
a Tick the VLAN On check box of the port pair for which VLAN tagging must
be switched on.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
6 In the Advanced TS Settings table, modify the following parameters:
FEC Profiles
The PRO-MPEG forum provides two FEC profiles, viz.: 1D FEC and 2D FEC, each
having multiple FEC schemes.
1D FEC Profile
The 1D FEC profile maps the RTP packet stream across columns (matrix of data
packets), see illustration below.
The XOR boolean operation is performed on the column RTP packets. This approach
provides robustness against single missing RTP packets and multiple consecutive
missing packets as long as only one packet is missing in a column and the numbers of
consecutive missing packets do not exceed the number of columns (L).
Example: When data packets 9, 10, and 11 are missing at the receiver side, these
packets can be reconstructed by means of the remaining column packets and FEC
packet 1, 2, and 3.
2D FEC scheme is able to reconstruct multiple missing packets in a singe row and in a
single column.
Example: In the illustration below, data packet 1, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 are lost.
Data packet 1, 7, and 13 can be reconstructed by means of the remaining row packets
and associated row FEC packets ('1, '2, and '3). Once data packet 1, 7, and 13 are
reconstructed, data packet 9, 10, 11, and 12 can be reconstructed by the associated
column data packets and column FEC packets (1, 2, 3, and 4).
FEC Schemes
The FEC scheme is determined by the number of columns or row Length (L) and the
number of rows or column Depth (D). Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3 specify
following limits:
For 1D FEC profile:
L * D 100
1 L 20
4 D 20
For 2D FEC profile:
L * D 100
4 L 20
4 D 20
Note: For outgoing Transport Streams the DCM allows using L x D 256.
: Not allowed
Sending Arrangements
The DCM implements both Pro-MPEG COP#3 release 2 Annex A and Annex B FEC
packet sending arrangement.
Annex A (non block aligned FEC arrangement): Each FEC packet is transmitted L
packets after the last data packet it pertains to.
Annex B (block aligned FEC linearisation): Column FEC packets are sent by using
an interleaver.
Requirements
Forward error correction needs a FEC Card on the corresponding interface card. In
the DCM Configuration, DCM Inputs, and DCM Outputs tree the presence of a FEC
Card is indicated in the Card branch.
The FEC option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each incoming Transport
Stream, preconfigured incoming Transport Stream, and outgoing Transport Stream
for which FEC error protection is enabled and each incoming Transport Stream for
which packet reordering is enabled, needs one FEC License. More information
concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 17.
4 In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following error protection profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without FEC will be done.
Default (xxxxxxxx): the default value will be used. The default value is shown
between brackets.
5 Perform the following steps for the column FEC stream:
a In the left hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
b For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Column FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the left hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
column FEC stream.
6 In case of FEC 2D profile, perform the following steps for the row FEC stream:
a In the right hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
multicast IP address.
b For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address, enter
the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP address
must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the right hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the row
FEC stream.
Note: The Row FEC Stream IP box and the right hand Type drop down box and UDP
box are only applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tips:
When the FEC parameters are configured properly, the L, D and FEC overhead,
and latency appear in the TS FEC table.
The arrow in the Statics column can be used to open the TS_FEC_Statistics
popup. More information concerning FEC statistics can be found in sub topic
Checking the FEC Statistics on page 167.
To Configure the FEC Settings for Multiple Incoming Transport Streams of a Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure FEC settings for multiple
incoming Transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams for
which FEC settings must be configured.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC sub page containing the FEC Settings table is
displayed.
Tips:
In the FEC Settings table, each row represents an incoming Transport Stream
or a preconfigured Transport Stream. More information concerning
preconfigured Transport Streams can be found in topic To Configure the FEC
Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming Transport Stream on page 163.
An incoming or preconfigured Transport Stream is identified by its
destination IP address and UDP port.
Note: The Service - TS FEC sub page is only applicable if the GbE Interface Card is
provided with FEC Card.
5 In the Mode drop down box of the corresponding Transport Stream, select one of
the following error protection profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without FEC will be done.
Default (xxxxxxxx): the default value will be used. The default value is shown
between brackets.
6 Perform the following steps for the column FEC stream:
a In the left hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
b For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Column FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the left hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
column FEC stream.
7 In case of FEC 2D profile, perform the following steps for the row FEC stream:
a In the right hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
multicast IP address.
b For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address, enter
the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP address
must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the right hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the row
FEC stream.
Note: The Row FEC Stream IP box, the right hand Type drop down box and UDP
box are only applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
8 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Tips:
When the FEC parameters of an incoming Transport Stream are properly
configured, the L, D, FEC, and latency overhead appears in the FEC Settings
table.
The arrow in the Statics column of an incoming Transport Stream can be used to
open the TS_FEC_Statistics popup. More information concerning FEC statistics
can be found in sub topic Checking the FEC Statistics on page 167.
5 In the Add Preconfigured TS table, configure the FEC settings for the
preconfigured Transport Stream as described in the following steps.
a In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream in the IP
box and the UDP port number in the UDP box.
c In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet re-ordering without FEC will be done.
d In the FEC Streams drop down box, select on of the following values:
Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: The FEC streams have the destination IP
address of the incoming Transport stream. The destination UDP port of
the column FEC stream is the UDP port number of Transport Stream
increased by 2 and the destination UDP port number of the row FEC
stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port increased by
4.
Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: The FEC streams have the destination UDP
port of the incoming Transport stream. The destination IP address of the
column FEC stream is the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1 and
the destination IP address the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the
Transport Stream IP Address increased by 2.
Custom Setting: The settings for the Column and Row FEC streams are
configurable.
e Perform the following steps if the FEC Streams parameter is set to Custom
Setting.
In the Column Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following
values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC
stream is a multicast IP address.
For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP
address, enter the IP address in the Column IP box and the UDP port in
the UDP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Column
Socket Type drop down box.
In the Row Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following
values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box and the UDP port in
the UDP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Row
Socket Type drop down box.
Note: The Row Socket Type drop down box, Row IP and UDP box are only
applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: The preconfigured Transport Stream is added to the FEC Settings table.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Notes:
Preconfigured incoming Transport Streams with FEC settings for which the
Mode is set to FEC 1D, FEC 2D, or Packet Reordering can only be done when free
FEC licenses are available. More information concerning licenses can be found in
topic Licensing on page 17.
In the FEC Settings table, preconfigured Transport Streams with configured FEC
settings can be removed by ticking the check box of the corresponding
preconfigured Transport Stream and pressing the Remove Checked Items
command button.
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following error protection
profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without forward error
correction will be done.
b In the FEC Stream drop down box, select one of the following values:
Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: The FEC streams have the destination IP
address of the incoming Transport stream. The destination UDP port of
the column FEC stream is the UDP port number of Transport Stream
increased by 2 and the destination UDP port number of the row FEC
stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port increased by
4.
Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: The FEC streams have the destination UDP
port of the incoming Transport stream. The destination IP address of the
column FEC stream is the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1 and
the destination IP address the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the
Transport Stream IP Address increased by 2.
Note: The FEC Stream drop down box is only applicable if the FEC 1D or FEC
2D profile is selected.
6 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
- Valid Packets: represents the number of IP packets received by the DCM for
the corresponding Transport Stream.
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.
Note: When the Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Stream is set to
UDP and the Mode parameter is set to FEC 1D or FEC 2D, a message box is
displayed asking to change the protocol to RTP.
To Configure FEC Settings for Multiple Outgoing Transport Streams of a Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure FEC settings for multiple
Transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams
for which FEC settings must be configured.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC page containing the FEC Settings table port is
displayed.
Tips:
In the FEC Settings table each outgoing Transport Stream is identified by
destination IP Address and UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.
To sort the FEC Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
5 Perform the following steps in the row of the Transport Stream for which FEC
settings must be configured:
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.
Note: When the Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Stream is set to
UDP and the Mode parameter is set to FEC 1D or FEC 2D, a message box is
displayed asking to change the protocol to RTP.
c Enter the destination IP address for the column FEC stream in the Column
FEC Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the
corresponding UDP box.
Notes:
The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are not applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to Disabled.
d Enter the destination IP address for the row FEC stream in the Row FEC
Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the corresponding
UDP box.
Notes:
The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are only applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
e To determine the FEC scheme, enter the number of columns in the L box and
the column depth (number of rows) in the D box.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
6 Repeat step a up to d for all Transport Streams for which the FEC settings must be
configured.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the configuration.
When particular FEC parameters for all Transport Streams on a port must be changed
to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser user interface can be
used. The following procedure describes how to use this function.
1 In the Update all TS table, enter the desired value in the box or select the desired
value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.
Note: Changing the Mode to FEC 1D or FEC 2D is only possible when the Output
Protocol parameter of the Transport Streams is set to RTP.
2 Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the FEC Settings table.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
5 In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following items:
Disabled: the FEC error generating process is disabled.
Single burst: the single FEC error burst will be executed.
Continuous: the continuous FEC generation process is enabled.
6 In the Good Packets box, enter the number of good packets that must be
transmitted before packets will be dropped.
7 In the Bad Packets box, enter the number of packets that must be dropped during
one burst cycle.
8 Enter the destination IP address of the Transport Stream in the TS IP box and the
UDP port number in the UDP box.
9 Press the Set command button
Result: The FEC error generating process is started. When applying new error
generation settings the previous error condition will be cleared automatically.
Notes:
The continuous FEC error generating process can be stopped by setting the Mode
to Disabled and pressing the Set command button.
A reboot of the DCM will clear the current error generation settings.
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.
b In the Sending Arrangement drop down box, select Annex A or Annex B.
c In the FEC Streams drop down box, select one of the following values.
Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: When a new Transport Stream is created, the
FEC stream(s) will get the IP address of the Transport stream. The column
FEC stream will get the Transport Stream UDP port increased by 2 and the
row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port
increased by 4.
Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: When a new Transport Stream is created, the
FEC stream(s) will get the UDP port of the Transport stream. The column
FEC stream will get the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1 and
the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream IP
Address increased by 2.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
d Enter the number of columns in the L box and the column depth (number of
rows) in the D box for determining the FEC scheme.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Service Re-Multiplexing
Passing Individual Services
Introduction
Two passing methods can be used to pass individual incoming services to an
outgoing Transport Stream, viz. the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method.
When a discreet number of individual services should be passed to a Transport
Stream, the Drag and Drop method is useful. When numbers of services must be
passed to one or more Transport Stream, the Muxing method is recommended.
An incoming service can be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream more than once.
The service ID will then be remapped and the components are shared between the
corresponding output services.
Muxing Method
The following steps explain how to pass numbers of services to one or more outgoing
Transport Stream(s) using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box TS
(MPTS).
Result: The Input Services and Output Transport Streams table are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transport Stream table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed to
the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes in the Input Services
table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport Streams table will be
cleared.
Preconfiguring Services
Introduction
The DCM allows configuring outgoing services which are not yet at the input of the
device. Therefore preconfigured services must be added to the outgoing Transport
Stream. Such preconfigured service can then be configured the same way as passed
services. Once the service becomes available at the input of the DCM, the service will
be passed to the output processed by the DCM (Transrating, Scrambling, DPI, etc...)
as preconfigured.
Tip: Preconfigured services can also be added via the Service and Scrambling tab
page on the Service - Service sub page.
a In the Input Card drop down box, enter the name of the interface card that
receives the Transport Stream from where this service should be passed.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives this
Transport Stream.
c In the Input Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for a GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the
GbE port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
d In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device of this Transport Stream streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving this Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
f In the Input SID box, enter the Service Identifier of the incoming service for
which a preconfigured output service must be created.
7 Press the Add command button.
Result: The preconfigured service is added to the Service Settings table.
6 In the Service Routing table, tick the check box preceding each row that must be
removed.
Tips:
To sort the Service Routing table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Service Routing table, tick
the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Results: The rows are removed from the Service Routing table.
5 In the Service Auto Pass Rules table, set the check box for the component type for
which the service passing rule must be switched on or clear the check box to
switch off the rule.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: All services of this incoming Transport Stream are added to the outgoing
Transport Stream.
Notes: When an incoming Transport Stream is passed to a GbE port, a new outgoing
Transport Stream is created containing the services of the incoming Transport
Stream. More information can be found in topic Creating a Transport Stream by Passing
an Incoming Transport Stream to a GbE Port on page 133.
Muxing Method
The following procedure explains how to pass al services of an incoming Transport
Stream to an outgoing Transport Stream using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select TS and in the Output drop down box TS
(MPTS).
Result: The Input TS and Output Transport Streams table are displayed.
During the passing process of services to an outgoing Transport Stream, all service
components (which are components referred in the PMT) will be passed. The PID of
an outgoing service component will get the PID of the corresponding incoming
service component. When two incoming service components with same PID are
passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, one of the outgoing components gets a new
unique PID.
All components of a particular incoming service can be passed to an outgoing service
by using Service Merging. Unreferenced components within an incoming Transport
Stream can be merged into an outgoing service by using the Add Custom PID function.
Merging Components into an outgoing service is described in topic Merging
Components on page 190.
Components within a service can be passing, blocking, and/or remapping by
defining Component Tracking Rules. More information can be found in topic Passing,
Blocking, and Remapping Service Components on page 200.
Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) with references in the CAT table are by
default blocked. The procedure to pass (and to remap if required) EMMs to an
outgoing Transport Stream is described in topic Passing and/Or Remapping EMM
Components on page 214.
Private date components offered to the DCM by the Private Data Generator via the
PDG to Mux interface are also blocked by default. These components can be passed
and remapped as described in topic Passing and/or Remapping Private Data Components
on page 220.
Components, which have no references in the PMT or CAT, are by default blocked by
the DCM. The procedures to pass and/or to remap unreferenced components can be
found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.
Individual incoming components can easily be passed by using the drag and drop
method. The procedure to pass individual component is described in topic Passing
Individual Components on page 187.
Note:
When a component must be removed from the output, which has its PID shared
with another component, both components must be blocked. E.g. when a video
component that is shared with a PCR must be removed both the video as well as
the PCR component must be blocked.
The table below shows the priorities that are used when PIDs are assigned to
outgoing components.
Higher
Components forced by using PID Multiplexing, SI, generated ECMs
Lower
Component passed without Component Tracking Rule
Example: When an unreferenced component is forced to PID 100 using Transport
Stream PID Multiplexing and a Tracking Rule is defined to force a service component
to PID 100, then the unreferenced component will be forced to PID 100 and the service
component remapped to another PID.
Note: When the incoming component is dropped to a service node or SPTS node, the
following message box appears.
- In the Stream Type box, enter the value of the stream type of the component.
The value can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
- Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button
to abort the operation.
The following table shows the stream type with corresponding value represented in
decimal and hexadecimal notation.
Merging Components
Introduction
Components within an incoming service as well as unreferenced components within
an incoming Transport Stream can be merged to an outgoing service. Merging
components within an incoming service can be done using Service Merging. All
components within the incoming service will be merged to the outgoing service.
Components within the outgoing service can be remapped or blocked by defining
Component Tracking Rules.
Unreferenced components can be merged into an outgoing service by using the Add
Custom PID function. This function can also be used to merge a particular component
within an incoming service to an outgoing service.
Note: During the service merging process the PMT section can exceed 1 kB.
Particular equipment is not able to handle this correctly. Therefore an alarm will be
generated when the PMT section exceeds 1 kB.
4 Select the icon of the incoming service and drag and drop this service to the icon
of the outgoing service.
Result: The service of the incoming Transport Stream is merged in the service of the
outgoing Transport Stream.
Tips:
An incoming service can also be merged into an outgoing service that is member
of a Transrating Group.
In the DCM Output tree, the name of a merged service is pink colored.
Muxing Method
The following procedure describes how to merge a service of an incoming Transport
Stream into a service of an outgoing MPTS using the muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In both the Input drop down box and Output drop down box select Service.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Services table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check box(es) of the services that must be
merged into outgoing services.
4 In the Output Services table, set the check box(es) of the services in which the
incoming services must be merged.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
Services table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected incoming services are
merged into the selected outgoing services. All check boxes in the Input Services
table and Output Services table will be cleared.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 Point to the Custom PIDs link below the Service Component Settings table.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page containing the Custom
PID Settings and Add Custom PID Row table is displayed.
7 In the Add Custom PID Row table, complete the following settings:
a In the Input Card drop down box, enter the name of the interface card that
receives the Transport Stream containing the component.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives the
Transport Stream containing the component.
c In the Input Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the
GbE port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
d In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the Transport Stream containing the component.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
f In the Input PID box, enter the PID of the component.
Tip: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
g In the Output SID drop down box, select the service in which the component
must be merged.
h In the Output ES Type box, enter the Elementary Stream type of the
component.
Tip: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
i Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The new row is added to the Custom PID Settings table.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
- Type:
Main: indicates the service in which services are merged.
Added: indicates the service(s) that is (are) merged in the Main service.
- Card: represents the card receiving the service.
- Port: represents the port receiving the service.
- IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to which the
Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to which
the Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the SDT).
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the PAT).
- SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service (as defined in
the PAT).
- Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
- Present: indicates the presence of the service at the input.
- Backup: link to the Service - Service - Backup Services sub page containing
the service backup settings and backup to main service assignments.
Tip: To sort the Merged Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 Point to the Custom PIDs link below the Service Component Settings table.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page is displayed.
The individual merged components listed in the Custom PID Settings table are
accompanied with following information:
Output - SID: represents the service identifier of the outgoing service in
which the component is merged.
Output - Name: represents the name of the outgoing service in which the
component is merged.
Output - ES Type: represents the stream type of the component.
Input - Card: represents the interface card receiving the component.
Input - Port: represents the port receiving the component.
Input - Type: represents the input type.
Input - IP Address: represents the IP address to which the source device
streams.
Input - UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the input port receiving
the component.
Input - PID: represents the packet identifier of the component.
Tip: The rows in the Custom PID Settings table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
Tip: To sort the Merged Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
7 Tick the check box, which is located beside the Type parameter of the services
that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Merged Services table, tick the
check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check
box of the last row.
8 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Tips:
The rows in the Custom PID Settings table can be re-ordered using a
particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. Toggle
between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter
header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Custom PID Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
8 Point to the Remove Checked Rows command button.
The following list describes the different methods to identify a service component.
Component Tag
The service component identification is based on the component tag from the Stream
Identifier Descriptor in the PMT.
PCR
The identification is based on the PCR of the service.
Stream Type
The service component identification is based on the stream type of the component.
Pre-defined as well as user-defined stream types can be used. The following table
lists the pre-defined stream types.
ES PID
The identification is based on the Elementary Stream PID.
ECM PID
The service component identification is based on Entitlement Control Message (ECM)
components passed for Service Level Scrambling. More information concerning
Service Level Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on page 365.
ES ECM PID
The identification is based on ECM components passed for Elementary Stream Level
Scrambling. The ECM component matching the defined input PID and ES Output
PID will be processed. More information concerning Elementary Stream Level
Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on page 365.
During the matching process a component can match several rules. To determine
which rule is applied, priorities are assigned. The following table lists these
priorities.
Higher
Component blocking
Component forcing using PCR type Component Tracking Rule
Priority
Level
Component forcing using Component Tag type Component Tracking
Rule
Component forcing using Stream Type type Component Tracking Rule
Lower
Component forcing using ES PID type Component Tracking Rule
Matching Behavior
Blocking of a service component will be done if the identification defined in the
tracking component rule matches the component perfectly (perfect match), viz.:
- The PCR of the service component matches the PCR value of the defined rule.
- The component tag of the service component matches the component tag
value of the defined rule.
- In case of video components, the stream type of the service component
matches the stream type of the defined rule.
- In case of audio components, the stream type and language of the service
component match to the stream type and language defined by the rule. When
no language is specified in the rule, the audio component without language in
the language descriptor will be identified.
- In case of private data components, the stream type of the component matches
the stream type of the defined rule (with additional descriptor tag for teletext
or subtitles if so desired).
- For PID matching (ES PID, ECM PID, and ES ECM PID) the PIDs are equal.
Passing and/or remapping service components have the same perfect matching
behavior as blocking but extended with following good matching exception:
When a service type component tracking rule is defined and no service component
matches this rule exactly, the rule will be applied to a similar component. E.g. when a
component tracking rule is defined with stream type equal to Video (0x01) and the
service only contains a video service component with stream type Video (0x02), then
this service component will be passed/remapped.
Notes:
- When the Stream Type parameter of the incoming Transport Stream is set to
DC-II, a service component with stream type equal to Video (0x80) will also be
identified as video.
- All audio languages match as long as the stream type is the same.
Components with Audio (0x3), Audio (0x4), and Audio (0x81) stream type
can not be mixed.
When multiple service components match a component tracking rule, then a
random component matching this rule will be processed.
Output PID - Current: represents the Packet Identifier (PID) of the outgoing
service component.
Component Description:
- Type: represents the component classification.
- ES PID: represents the PID of the elementary stream to which an ES ECM
belongs to.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier (SID) of the outgoing service the
component belongs to.
- Name: represents the name of the service.
- ES Type: represents the type of the elementary stream.
- Language: represents the language of the service component.
- CA ID: represents the identifier of the Conditional Access (CA) system.
Status - Current: indicates the status of the service component.
- Passed
- Blocked
- Blocked by System
- Blocked by DPI
- Blocked by TS Rule
Input:
- Card: represents the interface card slot number of the port receiving the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the IP stream containing
the incoming Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, on which enters
the Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- PID: represents the Packet Identifier of the incoming service components.
- Tag: represents the component tag from the Stream Identifier Descriptor in
the PMT.
- Type: represents the passing method of the component
Auto: the component is passed during service passing process or during
merging a service into an outgoing service.
Custom: the component is passed by merging the component into the
outgoing service individually.
Tracking Rule: contains the command button for the tracking rule action that can
be performed.
- Create Rule: command button used to auto-create a tracking rule for the
corresponding service component. The best tracking with highest priority for
the corresponding service component is chosen by default.
E.g. When a tracking rule is added after clicking on the Create Rule command
button in the row of an audio service component, a Stream Type tracking rule
is created with:
Tracking - Stream Type parameter: Audio (0x03)
Tracking - Language parameter: the language as defined in the language
descriptor
Output - SID parameter: the Service Identifier of the outgoing service to
which the component belongs to
The following procedure explains how to check the settings of service components in
a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which service component settings must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page containing the Service Component
Settings table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Service Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing to the header.
Tracking Rules
Introduction
Service component tracking rules are accommodated in the Component Tracking
Rules table for an outgoing Transport Stream.
The following ways can be used to create service component tracking rules:
By adding a default service component tracking rule.
By creating a service component tracking rule for a particular service component.
A component tracking rule will be added to the Component Tracking Rules table
containing defaults for best tracking with highest priority for the corresponding
service component.
By creating best match pass service component rules for all service components.
For each service component a service component tracking rule will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table containing defaults for best match pass
tracking with highest priority.
By creating PID type pass rules service component rules for all service
components.
For each service component a service component tracking rule will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table containing defaults for PID type pass
tracking with highest priority.
Tips:
The status of the component tracking rule is shown in the Rule Status - Active
column.
Service component tracking rules can also be defined by executing the
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro via ROSA's Macro Component. For more
information please refer to topic Using DCM Macros on page 593.
Notes:
In the Component Tracking Rule table, a TS PID force rule using the same PID as
a PID level components tracking rule will be red colored.
A service component tracking rule adaptation mostly results in a PMT
adaptation, meaning each time a component tracking rule is added, changed, or
deleted and the Apply command button is pressed, the PMT will be updated.
Therefore it is advisable to modify (adding, creating, modifying, and deleting) the
complete set of component tracking rules before pressing the Apply command
button.
When multiple service components match a service component tracking rule, the
rule will only be applied to one service component. To deal with this, multiple
rules must be defined.
Tip: A rule applied to a service component can be highlighted by pressing the Goto
Rule command button in the row of the corresponding component in the Service
Component Settings table.
Note: By changing rule parameters, the rule can be applied to another component,
e.g. when the Tracking - Type parameter is changed from ES PID to PCR, the rule
will be applied to the PCR of the service to which the component belongs.
7 In the Component Tracking Rules table, tick the check box(es) in front of the
row(s) of the tracking rule(s) that must be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Component Tracking Rules
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold
down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be
deleted.
The rows in the Component Tracking Rules table can be sorted by a specific
parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
8 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the selected
tracking rule rows are removed from the Component Tracking Rules table.
Tip: Service component tracking rules can also be removed by executing the
DCM.RemoveRules macro via ROSA's Macro Component. For more information
please refer to topic Using DCM Macros on page 593.
When a board level rule is created to e.g. autopass component type 0x4 and a
service is passed that has 2 components with component type 0x4, only one of
them will get passed (if Transport Stream rules specify that all components
should be blocked by default). Reason is that a rule can only be applied to one
component only.
The procedure to disable service auto pass rules can be found in topic Switching
On or Off Service Passing Rules on page 181.
The following steps explain how to add default tracking rules.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default tracking rules must be defined.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page is displayed.
5 Click on the Add Row command button that is located below the Default
Tracking Rules table.
Result: An entry is added to the Default Tracking Rules table.
6 Modify the default tracking rule entry as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking rules on page 209.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: A default tracking rule entry can be removed by ticking the check box of the
entry, pointing to the Remove Checked Rows command button, and clicking on the
Apply command button to confirm the operation.
EMM Components
Introduction
In a Conditional Access System, the Entitlement Management Message Generator
(EMMG) offers the Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) via the EMMG to
MUX interface or via a Transport Stream. Both the EMMs entered via the EMMG to
MUX interface and the EMMs entered via a Transport Stream must be passed to the
corresponding outgoing Transport Stream. More information concerning Conditional
Access Systems can be found in chapter Scrambling on page 357.
Note: The EMMs entering the DCM via the EMMG to MUX interface populate the
EMM Generated table and the EMMs via an incoming Transport Stream populate the
Input EMM table.
Tip: To sort the Input EMM, EMM Generated, or Output Transport Streams table
by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input EMM or EMM Generated table, set the check box(es) of the EMM
component(s) that must be passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the EMM component(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input EMM, EMM Generated,
and Output Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected EMM components are
passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes in the Input
EMM or EMM Generated table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport
Streams table will be cleared.
Tips:
- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
Note: The EMMs entering the DCM via the EMMG to MUX interface populate the
Generated EMMs table and the EMMs via an incoming Transport Stream populate
the EMMs table.
- EMMs table:
Output PID - Current: the current PID of the EMM component
Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the EMM component.
Type: component type
Input - Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the EMM component belongs to
Input - Port: the port number of the incoming Transport Stream the EMM
component belongs to
Input - IP Address: the IP address of the device that streams the Transport
Stream to which the EMM component belongs to
Input - UDP Port: the UDP port of the device that streams the Transport
Stream to which the EMM component belongs to
Input - ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream
the EMM component belongs to
Input - TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to
which the EMM component belongs to
Input - PID: the Packet Identifier of the incoming EMM component
- Generated EMMs table
Output PID - Current: the current PID of the EMM component
Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the EMM component.
Type: component type
Input - Proxy Name: name of the EMM Generator as defined during the
configuration process of the scrambling specific parameters of the DCM
(via ROSA's SCS Configurator)
Input - Client ID: a unique label to identify the EMM Generator
Input - Channel ID: a unique label to identify the EMM channel
Input - Stream ID: a unique label to identify the EMM stream
Input - Data ID: a unique identifier to identify the EMM stream allocated
by the CAS.
Tips:
- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
6 In the row of the EMM component that should be remapped, tick the Output PID
- New check box.
7 Enter the new PID in the Output PID - New box. A value within the range 0 (0x0)
- 8190 (0x1FFE) can be entered.
Notes:
The new PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by
0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering
the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX
interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PSI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
6 In the EMMs and Generated EMMs table tick the check box, which is located
beside the Current column, of each EMM that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the EMMs and Generated EMMs
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: To sort the Private Data and Output Transport Streams table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Private Data table, set the check box(es) of the Private Data component(s)
that must be passed.
4 In the Output PID box of the Private Data components that must be passed, enter
a unique PID value.
5 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the Private Data component(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Private Data and Output
Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
6 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected Private Data
components are passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes
in the Private Data table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport Streams
table will be cleared.
Tips:
- Output PID - Current: the current PID of the Private Data component
- Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the Private Data
component.
- Type: component type
- Input - Proxy Name: name of the Private Data Generator as defined during
the configuration process of the scrambling specific parameters of the DCM
(via ROSA's SCS Configurator)
- Input - Client ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data Generator
- Input - Channel ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data channel
- Input - Stream ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data stream
- Input - Data ID: a unique identifier to identify the Private Data stream
allocated by the CAS
Tips:
- To sort the Private Data PIDs table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
6 In the Private Data PIDs table, enter a new PID in the Output PID - New box of
the Private Data component that must be remapped.
Notes:
The new PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by
0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering
the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX
interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PSI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tips:
Introduction
When an incoming Transport Stream is passed by dragging and dropping the
complete Transport Stream to the output, only the services and components referred
to these services are passed. The components without reference in the PMT or CAT
table are not passed.
Passing non-service components to an outgoing Transport Streams can be done using
the PID Multiplexing or using the drag and drop method.
Note: Merging non-service components into an outgoing service can be done using
the Add Custom PID method. For more information please refer to topic Merging
Individual Components into an Outgoing Service on page 193.
7 In the Input Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card that
receives the incoming Transport Stream to which the component belongs to.
8 In the Input Port drop down box, select the name of the input port that receives
the incoming Transport Stream to which the component belongs to.
9 In the Input Type drop down box, select the input port type, viz.:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE
port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
10 In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop down box
is set to GbE Multicast.
11 In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down box is
set to ASI.
12 Multiple incoming components with consecutive PIDs can be passed and
remapped by defining an Insert PID Range. Perform the following additional
steps to pass and remap multiple incoming components.
a Tick the Insert PID Range check box.
Result: The First Input PID, Last Input PID, and First Output PID boxes
become applicable.
b In the First Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component with the
lowest PID value of the consecutive incoming components.
c In the Last Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component with the
highest PID value of the consecutive incoming components.
d In the First Output PID box, enter the PID of the component with the lowest
PID value.
Tip: When these components must be remapped, enter a new PID for the
component with the lowest PID value in the First Output PID box, after
pressing the Insert Range command button, the other components get a new
consecutive PID value.
e Press the Insert Range command button.
Result: The Input PID/Output PID rows in the PID Multiplexing table are cleared
and enlarged with the new passed components.
Notes:
Since the Input PID/Output PID rows are cleared after pressing the Insert
Range command button, these additional steps to pass and remap multiple
consecutive incoming component must be performed before individual
incoming components are passed and remapped.
When no individual incoming component must be passed, step 13 and 14 can
be omitted.
13 In the Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component that must be
passed to the output.
14 In the Output PID box, enter a new PID for the outgoing component.
Tip: Pressing the Insert Row command button creates additional Input PID/Output
PID rows in the PID Multiplexing table that can be used to pass multiple incoming
components.
15 Point to the Add command button to confirm the passing process.
Notes:
PIDs can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation, independent of
the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For more
information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Changing the
Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
- manual remapped SI tables
- manual remapped service components
- manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering the
DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX interface
- passed Transport Stream components
Note: Components within incoming services can also be dragged and dropped to the
Unreferenced PIDs main node of an outgoing Transport Stream. When the dropped
service component has a reference in the PMT or CAT of the Transport Stream (the
dropped component is already present into a service) the component will be forced to
its original value and added to the TS Component Settings table.
Introduction
The DCM avoids PID collisions at its output by remapping conflicting PID values
automatically. PID remapping can also be done manually by means of the web
browser user interface.
Tips:
Tips:
Input
Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to which the
component belongs
Port: the port number of the incoming Transport Stream the component
belongs to
IP Address: the IP address of the destination port to which the Transport
Stream, to which the incoming components belongs, streams.
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the of the destination port to which
the Transport Stream, to which the incoming components belongs,
streams.
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream the
component belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to which
the component belongs
PID: the Packet Identifier of the incoming component
Removing Components
The following procedure explains how to remove unreferenced components from the
output.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which components
must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 Click on the TS Component tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.
Tips:
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the TS Components Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press to the Remove command button.
In both the inner and outer loop of a PMT descriptors can be added by creating
individual descriptor entries via the web browser user interface or by importing
descriptor files. Descriptor files can be created by for instance ROSA SI Editor Task.
Individually added descriptors and descriptors imported via descriptor files can
easily be removed. Descriptors passed during the service passing process can be
removed by defining PMT rule entries (called descriptor removal rules). Descriptors
matching descriptor removal rules will be removed. Descriptor removal rules can be
created for inner loop descriptors as well as for outer loop descriptors.
The order of the inner loop and outer loop descriptors can be changed by creating
PMT rule entries (called descriptor order rules). Each descriptor order rule has a
criterion consisting of descriptor Tag and optionally descriptor content bytes. The
descriptor matching the first rule will be first in the PMT, descriptors matching the
second rule, second, etc... The order of the descriptors within the PMT depends on
the order of the descriptor order rules.
Note: These settings are only used when the Output - Mode for the PMT is set to
Generated or Transparent Generated. The rules can be applied to PMTs generated by
the DCM as well as PMTs imported by a PSIG.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which descriptors must be imported.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the Add PMT Descriptor table, tick the Import Data From File check box.
8 Point to the Browse... command button that appears after ticking the Import Data
From File check box.
Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.
9 Browse to the descriptor file and select this file.
10 Click on the Open command button.
Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and file name appear in the
Data File box.
11 Press the Add Row command button.
12 Click on the Apply command button.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the PMT Descriptor table, tick the check
box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
The rows in the PMT Descriptor table can be sorted by a specific parameter by
pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending
and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.
8 Click on the Remove Checked Items command button.
a In the Type drop down box, select Inner Loop Removal to create a removal rule
for inner loop descriptors or select Outer Loop Removal to create a removal rule
for outer loop descriptors.
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.
Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Notes:
The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
These bytes are the first bytes of the descriptor and are optionally in
the rule.
d Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules or
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table depending on the type selection.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which descriptors order rules must be created.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the Add PMT Descriptor Rule table, complete the following settings:
a In the Type drop down box, select Inner Loop Order to create a descriptor order
rule for inner loop descriptors or select Outer Loop Order to create a rule for
outer loop descriptors.
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.
Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Note: The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
d Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules or Inner
Loop Descriptor Order Rules table depending on the type selection.
Note: The order of the rules in both the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules
and Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table can be changed by pressing the
arrow in the Order column of the rule.
8 Continue adding descriptor order rules by performing step 6 or press the Apply
command button to confirm the operation.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in a Rules table, tick the check box of the
first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
check box of the last row that must be deleted.
The rows in a Rules table can be sorted by a specific parameter by pointing to the
column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by clicking on the parameter header.
8 Click on the corresponding Remove Checked Rows command button.
a In the Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Inner Loop Removal: to create a removal rule for inner loop descriptors
Outer Loop Removal: to create a removal rule for outer loop descriptors
Inner Loop Order: to create a descriptor order rule for inner loop
descriptors
Outer Loop Order: to create a rule for outer loop descriptors
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.
Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Note: The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
d Press the Add command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules,
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules, Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules,
or Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table depending on the type selection.
Note: The order of the rules in both the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules
and Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table can be changed by pressing the
arrow in the Order column of the rule.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Note: Entries in the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules, Inner Loop Descriptor
Removal Rules, Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules, or Inner Loop Descriptor
Order Rules table can be removed by ticking the check box in front of the entry and
pressing the Remove Checked Rows command button.
h For an EITa sch table, select the corresponding service in the Service drop
down box and the corresponding table identifier in the drop down box beside
the Table drop down box.
i For an EITo sch table, enter the ON ID, TS ID, and SID in the corresponding
boxes and select the corresponding table identifier in the drop down box
beside the Table drop down box.
j Press the Add command button.
Result: The selected table is added to the SI Table In Tree table and the data
added to the SI Tree.
Note: Some tables, like PAT, CAT, PMT, and SDTa, are immediately added to
the tree. Other tables will get the status Pending. Pressing the Reload
command button change the status to Loaded (success) or Not Found (failure).
Tips:
You can browse through the SI Tree by expanding and collapsing
branches.
A table can be removed from the user interface by ticking the check box of
the corresponding PSI/SI table in the SI Table In Tree table and clicking
on the Remove Checked Items command button.
A PSI/SI table can be refreshed by clicking on the corresponding Reload
command button in the row of the corresponding table.
All PSI/SI tables can be refreshed by clicking on the Reload All command
button.
6 Repeat step 5 for all PSI that must be displayed.
Tip: You can browse through the PSI/SI information by expanding and collapsing
branches.
Tips:
To sort the SI Table Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
The EIT entry population in the SI Table Settings table can be reduced by
using filters ( ). The following list shows these filters:
Exclude EIT and others: no EIT tables and no 'other' tables (tables referring
to another Transport Stream) are displayed (used by default).
EIT only for <service>: only the EIT tables for the corresponding service
will be displayed.
Show All Other: all 'other' tables (tables referring to another Transport
Stream) are displayed.
Show All Actual: all tables referring to this Transport Stream are displayed.
6 In the Output - Mode drop down box, select the desired generation mode.
Generate
Transparent
Transparent Generated
Stop
Note: When the generation mode is set to Transparent, the input identification
settings of the stream containing the SI settings must be given.
a In the Input - Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card
receiving the Transport Stream to which the PSI/SI information belongs.
b In the Input - Port drop down box, select the name of the input port used to
receive the Transport Stream to which the PSI/SI information belongs.
c In the Input - Type drop down box, select the input port type, viz.:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for an GbE Multicast input port
d In the Input - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input - IP Address box is only applicable if the Input - Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the Transport Stream.
Note: The Input - UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input - Type drop
down box is set to ASI.
f In the Input - PID box, enter the PID of the PSI information.
Notes:
For the PMT, a PID between 0 (0x0) and 31 (0x1F) can not be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs)
entering the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the
EMMG to MUX interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PIDs occupied by PSI/SI tables for which the generation mode is set to
Transparent cannot be used except when the PIDs of the incoming PSI/SI
tables are identical.
7 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip:
The arrow in the View column of the SI Table Settings table can be used to
display the PSI/SI information of the corresponding table.
When Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparently Generated and no
PSIG data is available for the table, the table will be generated. When the PSIG
data becomes available, the table will be generated with this information. In case
of a NITa, an empty section will be added.
Modifying the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables to a particular
value can be done in one step by selecting the operation in the Mode drop down
box in the EIT sch TS settings table and pointing to the Apply to EIT command
button.
- Stop All EITa p/f: the Mode parameter for all EITa present/following sub
tables is set to Stop.
- Generate All EITa p/f: the Mode parameter for all EITa present/following sub
tables is set to Generate.
- Stop All EITa sch: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables is set to
Stop.
- Generate All EITa sch: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables is
set to Generate.
- Generate EITa sch first 8 days: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule first 8
days tables are set to Generate.
Notes:
When the Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparent, all tables on
this PID will be transparently passed, even if not indicated in the user interface.
When tables are offered to a DCM by a PSIG, tables unknown by the DCM can be
imported which are not normally available on the DCM (e.g. SDTo, NITo, BAT,
etc.). Importing a PMT of a service unknown by the DCM is also possible. Such
tables are labeled with Import Only and the Output - Mode parameter can only be
set to Generated or Transparently Generated.
5 In the Generation column of the Default SI Table playout table, select the
desired mode for the corresponding table.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
These values can be changed for a particular Transport Stream or for all Transport
Streams on a particular port.
Tip: To reduce the number of parameter adaptations, the default playout interval
values can be changed. The procedure to change these default values can be found in
topic Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters on page 258.
Note: When a table is imported (PSIG) and the PSIG has specified a playout rate for
this table, the playout rate specified by the PSIG will be used. This setting will be
used when the PSIG does not specify a playout rate.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Changing PSI/SI Table Playout Interval Values for all Transport Streams on a Particular Port
Perform the following steps to change PSI/SI table playout interval values for all
Transport Stream on a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which PSI/SI table playout
interval values for all Transport Streams must be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click this port and point to View Port Settings
in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS SI Playout sub page.
Result: The Service - TS SI Playout sub page containing the SI Table Playout table is
displayed.
5 In the SI Table Playout table, change the Interval (ms) parameter for the table(s)
for which the playout interval must be changed.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: Since an ASI port only accepts one outgoing Transport Stream, this procedure
is not applicable for an ASI port.
5 In the Default SI Table Playout table, enter the desired value in the Interval (ms)
box of the corresponding PSI/SI table.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
To Set the Network PID Insertion Mode for a Particular Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to set the Network PID insertion mode for a
particular Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the Network
PID insertion mode must be set.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings and SI Table
Playout table is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, click on the View arrow in the PAT row.
Result: The PAT information sub page for the corresponding outgoing Transport
Stream is displayed.
7 In the Mode drop down box under the NIT in PAT table, select the desired mode,
viz.: Auto, Disabled, or Enabled.
8 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
To Set the Network PID Insertion Mode for New Created Transport Streams
The following procedure explains how to set the Network PID insertion mode for
new created Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
Network PID insertion mode for new created Transport Stream must be set.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page for the selected interface card
is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page point to the SI Table tab.
Result: The Default SI Table Playout and Default Nit in Pat table are displayed.
5 Under the Default NIT in PAT table, select the desired mode in the Mode drop
down box.
6 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Remapping PSI-Tables
Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows remapping the PAT, CAT, NITa,
NITo, SDTa, SDTo, EITa/o present/following, EITa/o schedule first 8 days, EITa/o
schedule after 8 days, BAT, TDT, and TOT to a value between 0 (0x0) and 8190
(0x1FFE) and the PMT to a value between 32 (0x20) and 8190 (0x1FFE).
Notes:
Remapping of an SI table to a PID occupied by a manual remapped component is
not allowed but remapping to a PID that is occupied by an SI table is allowed.
Remapping of an SI table to a PID occupied by an SI Table, for which the SI
Generation mode is set to Transparent, is not allowed.
Remapping of other SI tables can be done using the procedure describes in topic
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.
To Remap an SI Table
The following procedure describes how to remap an SI table.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which an SI table
should be remapped.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed containing the SI Table Settings
table.
Note: The EIT entry population in the SI Table Settings table can be reduced by
using filters ( ). The following list shows these filters:
Exclude EIT and others: no EIT tables and no 'other' tables (tables referring to
another Transport Stream) are displayed (used by default).
EIT only for <service>: only the EIT tables for the corresponding service will be
displayed.
Show All Other: all 'other' tables (tables referring to another Transport Stream)
are displayed.
Show All Actual: all tables referring to this Transport Stream are displayed.
6 Tick the Output - PID check box in the row of the SI table that must be remapped
and enter the new PID in the Output - PID box.
Note: The PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent on the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For
more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Default Values
for Settings of Incoming Transport Streams.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
8 Set the Name check box to rename the service and enter a new name in the Name
box.
9 In the SDT, Service Type, EIT Schedule Flag, EIT Present/Following, Running
Status, and Free CA Mode drop down box, select the desired values.
10 Set the Service Provider Name check box to rename the service provider and
enter a new name in the Service Provider Name box.
11 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
a In the Country Code drop down box, select the country to which the
descriptor applies.
b In the Region ID box, enter the identifier of the time zone in the country to
which the descriptor applies.
c In the Time Zone box, select the time zone to which the country belongs to.
All other parameters of the Add Time Offset Descriptor are determined on the basis
of these parameters.
7 Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The descriptor is added to the Local Time Offset Descriptor table.
8 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Note: These settings will only be used when the Output - Mode parameter for the
TOT is set to Generate.
6 For a PMT, select the service in the Service drop down box.
a In the Forced SID column, tick the check box of the row of the service for
which the SID must be modified and enter the new SID in the corresponding
box.
b In the Forced Name column, tick the check box of the row of the service for
which the name must be modified and enter the new name in the
corresponding box.
c In the SD/HD drop down box of the corresponding row, select the definition
of the service.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tips:
Pressing the arrow in the PMT or SDT column opens a sub page containing the
corresponding table information of the service.
The Merged column indicates if a service is merged into the outgoing service.
When a service is merged, Yes with an arrow appears in the Merged column of
the corresponding service row. Pressing this arrow opens the Service - Service -
Merge Detail sub page. For more information about merged services, please
refer to topic Merging Components on page 190.
Note: After clearing the Forced SID check box, the service will not be remapped to its
original value, you have to change the SID manually as described in the procedure
above.
a In the Scrambling drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Scrambling allowed: scrambling is allowed for the service or for
components belonging to the service.
No Scrambling: scrambling is not allowed for the service or for
components belonging to the service.
Note: The Scrambling drop down box is only applicable if the interface card
of the outgoing Transport Stream to which the service is passed is provided
with a Co-Processor Card.
b In the Block CA Info column, tick the check box if CA info must be blocked.
7 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Tip: For more information concerning scrambling, please refer to chapter Scrambling
on page 357.
Tips:
The Transrating Services Settings table contains all services of an outgoing
Transport Stream.
When the outgoing Transport stream is provided with multiple
Transrating Groups, the Transrating Group to which the service belongs
to, are shown in the TR Group Name column.
The Transrating settings are not applicable if the services do not belong to
a Transrating Group.
The services in the Transrating Services Settings table are indicated by their
SID and name.
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Stat Muxed: the service participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing
group of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
Rate Limited: the service will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this service, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the service. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).
7 Continue adapting more services or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameters take only
the video component within the service into account.
Tips:
When particular parameters of all services of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
a In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all services of this Transrating Group.
6 In the DPI Settings table, complete the following settings to set up a Splice
Channel for a particular service.
7
Note: The services in the DPI Settings table are labeled with their Service Identifier
(Primary Channel - SID) and name (Primary Channel - Name).
a Set the Primary Channel check box to define a splice channel for the
corresponding service.
b In the Output Channel - Name box of the service in question, enter a name to
identify the Splice Channel.
Note: When the splicing events for this channel are triggered by an
AD-Server, the name entered in the Output Channel - Name box must match
the name given by the AD-Server.
c In the Output Channel - Mode drop down box, select one of the following
modes:
Off: DPI is switched off.
SCTE-30 / 35: splicing events are triggered by an AD-Server.
SCTE-35 Only: splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device.
Manual: splicing events are triggered via the web browser user interface of
the DCM.
SCTE-35 Only (Custom): splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion
device and the actions defined under Custom PID Mapping will be
followed.
Manual (Custom): splicing events are triggered via the web browser user
interface of the DCM system and the actions defined under Custom PID
Mapping will be followed.
Note: The Insertion Channel parameters are not applicable if splicing events
are triggered by an AD-Server (Output Channel - Mode = SCTE-30 / 35).
d In the Output Channel - PMT Mode drop down box, select on of the
following modes:
Follow Insertion: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Insertion Channel.
Follow Primary: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Primary Channel.
e In the Insertion Channel - Card box, enter the slot position of the board to
which the port of the incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
f In the Insertion Channel - Port box, enter the number of the port to which the
incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
g In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port type.
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
h In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast IP
address to which the source device streams.
Note: The Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address parameter is only
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
i In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
port receiving the Transport Stream the Insertion channel belongs to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the
Insertion Channel enters the device via an ASI port.
j In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the Insertion
Channel.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Notes:
When the Output Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-35 Only (Custom) or
to Manual (Custom) the sub page to define custom PID mapping entries can be
accessed by pressing the arrow that appears in the PIDs column. More
information about custom PID mapping can be found in topic Defining Custom
DPI Mapping Entries on page 350.
As soon as a splice channel is defined for a service (Primary Channel check box is
set) one or two DPI licenses, depending on the service definition (SD or HD), is
(are) consumed. The availability of DPI licenses for the splice channel is shown in
the License column.
The Status column represents the status of the splice channel, viz.: Primary or
Insertion.
When the Insertion Channel is present at the input, the Service Name of the
Insertion Channel together with the Original Network identifier (ON-ID) and
Transport Stream Identifier (TS-ID) of the Transport Stream containing the
Insertion Channel is displayed in the Info box.
When an Insertion Channel is defined for a particular output channel and the
Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel is not yet present at the GbE
port, a Transport Stream reservation is created.
After entering the Apply command button, all Splice Channels with Output
Channel - Mode equal to Manual are added to the DPI Start/Stop table.
Tip: More information about Digital Program Insertion can be found in chapter
Digital Program Insertion on page 339.
Result: Streaming is activated for all Transport Stream on the selected port.
Result: When the confirmation feature is switched on, the following confirmation box
is displayed.
Result: When the confirmation feature is switched on, the following confirmation box
is displayed.
Note: The ease with which services can be removed from the DCM Outputs tree can
lead to accidentally removing of services from the output. To protect the application
from accidentally removing of services, an additional confirmation can be asked. The
procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic
Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.
Tip: A service can also be removed from an outgoing Transport Stream by dragging
and dropping the service to the wastebasket.
Tips:
To sort the Service Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Services Settings table, tick
the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected services are removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.
Note: The ease with which services can be removed from the DCM Outputs tree can
lead to accidentally removing of services from the output. To protect the application
from accidentally removing of services, an additional confirmation can be asked. The
procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic
Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which Transport Streams can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally removing of Transport Streams from the output.
To protect the application from accidentally removing of services, an additional
confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this confirmation
feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.
Tip: An outgoing Transport Stream can also be removed from a GbE port by
dragging and dropping the icon of the Transport Stream to the wastebasket.
Note: Removing the outgoing Transport Stream from an ASI output is not possible.
Tip: To sort the TS Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table header
of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
4 Tick the check box, which is located beside the IP Address column in the TS
Settings table, of each Transport Stream that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the TS Settings table, tick the check
box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected Transport Streams are removed.
Transrating
- Name: represents the name of the Transrater Group to which the service
belongs.
- Type: represents the type of the Transrater Group to which the service
belongs.
In the Loop Through TSs table, each Transport Stream is accompanied with
following information.
Input TS
- Card: represents the name of the card receiving the Transport Stream.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the Transport Stream.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- UDP Port: represents the destination UDP port of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream. Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service - TS Input sub page
containing the settings of the incoming Transport Stream.
Output TS
- Card: represents the name of the card to which the Transport Stream is
passed.
- Port: represents the number of the port to which the Transport Stream is
passed. Pressing the Port value opens the Service - TS Output sub page
containing the settings of all outgoing Transport Streams of this port.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the outgoing Transport
Stream.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port of the outgoing Transport Stream.
Tip: To sort the Service Grooming table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
In This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................................... 296
Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams.............................. 300
Single Program Transport Stream Transrating .............................. 317
Transrating Examples ........................................................................ 333
Introduction
General
The transrating option of the DCM allows rate shaping for bandwidth capacity
optimization purposes, like re-compression to lower bit rates of individual services,
open loop statistical re-multiplexing, etc...
The Co-Processor Card, used for advanced digital processing, optimizes the
bandwidth capacity for the outgoing Transport Stream of the interface card on which
the Co-Processor Card is plugged.
The Transrating option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each transrated service
needs one or more Transrating Licenses depending on the service definition. A
transrated SD service takes one Transrating License and a HD service takes four
licenses.
Applications
The DCM with transrating option is applicable in many applications; some of these
applications are described in the following list:
Re-Compressing of Services and Transport Streams: In order to target the bit
rate of a Transport Stream in which the chosen modulation scheme fits, services
can be re-compressed. Re-compressing of Transport Streams or groups of
services within a Transport Stream can be done using Statistical Re-multiplexing
or using Bit Rate Limiting. Re-compressing can also be used to free-up
bandwidth in the Transport Stream for new services like Internet, etc...
Rate Limiting of Single Program Transport Streams: In applications where
video services are distributed over IP, the maximum bit rates of the Single
Program Transport Streams (SPTS) are specified in most situations, for instance to
3 Mbps in case of DSL applications. To fulfill these specifications, the bit rates of
the individual Transport Streams must be limited.
Transport Stream Bit Rate Overload Protection: The bit rates of incoming
services received from different sources and passed to an outgoing Transport
Stream are not often constantly or not exactly at the agreed specifications. The
DCM with transrating option can be used to ensure the full utilization of the
maximum bandwidth without bit rate overloads.
Note: Only the video part of a service can be transrated. The audio part of a service
containing video or services without video cannot be transrated and are passed
through.
Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
Note: If the maximum bit rate for rate limiting is set to a small value, rate limiting a
VBR service may results in a CBR program. In the example above, when the
maximum rate limit is set to for instance 2 Mbps, the service after rate limiting
becomes a CBR service.
Service with VBR Service with CBR
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
0 0
When the bit rate of a service does not exceed the maximum bit rate, the service will
not be processed. In this case the bit rate of the outgoing service matches the bit rate
of the incoming service.
Statistical Re-multiplexing
Statistical Re-multiplexing is a transrating process keeping the total bit rate of a
group of services under control by reducing the bit rate of individual services
according to the actual needs of these services compared to the other services in the
group. Statistical Re-multiplexing can be used in applications where the total bit rate
of a group of services must be reduced or where the Transport Stream must be
protected against bit rate overflow.
Bit Rate Reduction
When several services must be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream of which the
maximum bit rate is lower that the sum of the bit rates of these services, statistical
re-multiplexing can be done on all services or on a part of these services. The
following illustration shows a graphical representation of bit rate reduction on a
complete Transport Stream using Statistical Re-multiplexing.
Stuffing
30
Bitrate (Mbps)
25
20
15
10
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
30
Bitrate (Mbps)
25
20
15
10
Statistical Re-Multiplexing can also be used to free up some bandwidth for new
services.
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
0 0
MUX
Overflow
30
Maximum bit rate
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 Transport Stream
20
15
10
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
30
Maximum bit rate
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 Transport Stream
20
15
10
The services which should participate into a transrating process must be added to a
group (called Transrating Group). The bit rate variation of each service in a
Transrating Group can be limited by adding a minimum and a maximum bit rate
limit. Since high quality services require more bandwidth than low quality services,
each service within a Transrating Group can be provided with a priority. Services
with higher priority are allocated more bandwidth than services with lower priority.
Icon Description
MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group
A MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group contains all services within the outgoing
Transport Stream. It is obvious that only one MPTS - all Services type Transrating
Group can be created within a Transport Stream. When an incoming service is
passed to an outgoing Transport Stream containing a MPTS - all Services type
Transrating Group, the service is automatically added to this Transrating Group.
A Selective Services type Transrating Group is used when not all services of an
outgoing Transport Stream participate into the transrating process or when the
outgoing Transport Stream requires multiple Transrating Groups. The total bit rate
of each individual Selective Services type Transrating Group can be set. It is obvious
that the sum of the individual bit rates can't exceed the total bit rate of the outgoing
Transport Stream. Once a Selective Services type Transrating Group is created, the
services for this Transrating Group must be added.
Notes:
Since transrating gives a small delay to services, a service that doesn't participate
in a transrating process but should be synchronized with a transrated service,
must be added to the transrating group and passed through.
In contrast with MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group which includes all
components, a Selective Services type Transrating Group do not include Transport
Stream components like PAT, CAT, SDT, NIT EMMS, etc.... A Selective Services
type Transrating Group with all services of a Transport Stream is not the same as
a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group.
Transrating Mode
Once the Transrating Group(s) are added to a Transport Stream and populated with
services, the transrating mode must be determined for each individual service
belonging to the Transrating Group(s). The DCM device supports three transrating
modes, viz.:
Pass Through mode:
The service will be passed through with a particular delay without transrating. This
delay is used to synchronize the service with the transrated services in the
Transrating Group.
- Min Bit Rate (Mbps): the lower limit of the bit rate during transrating
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps): the upper limit of the bit rate during transrating
- Priority: Depending on the complexity of the services, the total available bit
rate of the Transrating Group is spread over the services depending on the
complexity of the scenes. The bit rate assigned to a service can be influenced
by giving a particular priority to the service. A higher priority gives a bigger
bit rate share than a lower priority. For example a Sport service needs more
bit rate than a Talk Show service. This Priority parameter can be set between
0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5 (normal).
Note: Setting the priority of all services to 10 results in the same distribution
as setting the priority of all services to for instance 9.
Coarse Delay Frame Rate Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay Delay
Standard n.a. n.a. n.a. 1400 ms
Extended n.a. n.a. n.a. 1800 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Low 755 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Normal 1040 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI High 1231 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Low 748 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Normal 1033 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI High 1224 ms
Coarse Delay Frame Rate Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay Delay
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Low 645 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Normal 930 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE High 1121 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Low 638 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Normal 923 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE High 1114 ms
Note: The TR Board Settings table is only available for an interface card populated
with Co-Processor Card.
3 In the Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control
algorithm, Quality or Performance.
4 In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode:
Standard
Extended
Predefined
Note: Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all Transrating
Groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.
a In the Name box of the Add New Transrating Group table, enter a name of
maximum 30 characters. A logical name facilitates the identification of the
Transrating Group in the application.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the total bit rate that can be used by
the transrating group. The total bit rate of a Transrating Group can vary
between 1 and 950 Mbps.
Note:
The sum of the total bit rates of the Transrating Group(s) and the bit rates
of the services not belonging to a Transrating Group can never exceed the
total bit rate of the outgoing Transport Stream. When the sum is less than
the total bit rate of the Transport Stream, the difference between both bit
rates can then be used further down in the chain.
For a MPTS - all Services Transrating Group this total bit rate includes the
bitrates of all components within the Transport Stream. For a Selective
Services Transrating Group, Transport Stream level components like PAT,
CAT, etc... are not included.
c In the Type drop down box, select the desired Transrating Group type.
MPTS - all Services: all services of the outgoing Transport Stream are
added to the Transrating Group.
Selective Services: an empty Transrating Group will be created and the
operator can decide which services must be added to the Transrating
Group. The procedure to add services to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group can be found in topic Adding Services to a Transrating
Group on page 307.
6 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation
Results:
Transrating Group settings are added to the Transrating Group Settings
table.
Tip: The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group
Setting table containing the transrating parameters of the service within the
selected Transrating Group. For more information concerning the
Transrating Group Setting table, please refer to topic Adapting the Transrating
Properties of a Service on page 310.
In the DCM Outputs tree, the Transrating Group is added to the outgoing
Transport Stream in question.
Muxing Method
Perform the following procedure to add a service to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input Services and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transrating Groups table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Transrating
Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
Transrating Groups table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed to
the selected Transrating Group(s). All check boxes in the Input Services table as well
as the check boxes in the Output Transrating Groups table will be cleared.
4 Adapt the Name and/or Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter of the Transrating
Group.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tips:
The Transrating Services Settings table contains all services of an outgoing
Transport Stream.
When the outgoing Transport stream is provided with multiple
Transrating Groups, the Transrating Group to which the service belongs
to can be found in the TR Group Name column.
The Transrating settings are not applicable if the services do not belong to
a Transrating Group.
The services in the Transrating Services Settings table are indicated by their
SID and name.
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Stat Muxed: the service participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing
group of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
Rate Limited: the service will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this service, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the service. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).
7 Continue adapting more services or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameters take only
the video component within the service into account.
Tips:
The transrating specific settings of outgoing services can also be modified on the
Transrating Group Settings table on the Service - Transrater sub page. This
table contains the outgoing services belonging to a specific Transrating Group.
This sub page can be opened by double-clicking on the Transrater Group Icon in
the DCM Outputs tree.
When particular parameters of all services of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
a In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all services of this Transrating Group.
The Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram depicts the bit rates of the services before
transrating and the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram at the right hand side the bit
rates after transrating. The red line in the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram
represents the Transport Stream bit rate and the black line represents the total used
bit rate of the Transrating Group. For VBR Transport Streams the red line is not
displayed.
The Services table provides the legend of the diagrams together with the input
(before transrating) and output bit rates (after transrating) and average compression
ratio (expressed in percent) of the services.
Tip: To sort the Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of
the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
header.
Notes:
When the total bit rate of the Transrating group is higher than the sum of the bit
rates of the incoming services for this Transrating Group, the bit rates of the
outgoing services will have a larger variation than the bit rates of the incoming
services. This is a normal behavior of the DCM transrater.
Coarse Delay Frame Rate Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay Delay
Standard n.a. n.a. n.a. 1400 ms
Extended n.a. n.a. n.a. 1800 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Low 755 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Normal 1040 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI High 1231 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Low 748 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Normal 1033 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI High 1224 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Low 645 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Normal 930 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE High 1121 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Low 638 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Normal 923 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE High 1114 ms
Note: The TR Board Settings table is only available for an interface card populated
with Co-Processor Card.
3 In the Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control
algorithm, Quality or Performance.
4 In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode:
Standard
Extended
Predefined
Note: Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all Transrating
Groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.
5 If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to Predefined, modify the following
parameters if required.
a In the Frame Rate Delay drop down box, select the frame rate of the incoming
video 25 Hz or 30 Hz.
b In the Input Board Type Delay drop down box, select the interface card: ASI
or GbE.
c In the Fine Delay drop down box, select the desired value: Low, Normal, or
High.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: The corresponding Co-Processor Card reboots.
a In the Name box of the Add New Transrating Group table, enter a name
(maximum 50 characters). A logical name facilitates the identification of the
Transrating Group in the application.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the total bit rate that can be used by
this Transrating Group. The total bit rate of a Multi-TS Transrating Group can
be set between 1 and 950 Mbps.
Nota: The total bit rate for Multi-TS Transrating Group includes all
components within the SPTS.
6 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: After pressing the Add command button the Transrating Group is added to the
Transrating Group Settings table.
The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group Setting table
containing the transrating parameters of the SPTSs within the selected Transrating
Group.
Tip: The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group Setting table
containing the transrating parameters of the SPTSs within the selected Transrating
Group. For more information concerning the Transrating Group Setting table,
please refer to topic Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS on page 327.
a In the Name box of the Transrating Group Settings table, enter a new name.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box of the Transrating Group Settings table,
enter the total bit rate that can be used by this Transrating Group.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: When particular parameters of all Transrating Groups on a port must be
changed to similar values, the Update All Transrating Groups function of the web
browser user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use
this function.
1 In the Update All TS table, enter the desired value in the box of the parameter
that should be changed for all Transrating Groups of the selected ports.
Introduction
Incoming services can be passed to a Multi-TS Transrating Group using the Drag &
Drop method or using the Muxing method. When a discrete number of services
should be passed to a Multi-TS Transrating Group, the Drag and Drop method is
useful. When numbers of services must be passed to one or more Multi-TS
Transrating Group, the Muxing method is recommended. The Drag and Drop
method allows passing an incoming Transport Stream to a Multi-TS Transrating
Group.
Note: After passing services to a Multi-TS Transrating Group, streaming of the new
created SPTSs must be activated. The procedure to activate Transport Streams can be
found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 282.
Result: The service or Transport Stream is passed to the Multi-TS Transrating Group.
Muxing Method
The following procedure describes how to pass incoming services to a Multi-TS
Transrating Group using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input Services and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.
Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transrating Groups table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Multi-TS
Transrating Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed to
the selected Multi-TS Transrating Group(s). All check boxes in the Input Services
table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transrating Groups table will be
cleared.
Note: SPTSs can also be created by passing one or more Transport Streams to a GbE
port. The following procedure explains how to pass one or more Transport Streams
to a GbE port using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select TS and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input TS and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.
3 In the Input TS table, set the check boxes of the services that must be passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Multi-TS
Transrating Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input TS and Output
Transrating Groups table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
the SHIFT key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: To identify a SPTS in the Transrating Group Settings table on the Service -
Transrater sub page, each outgoing SPTS is accompanied by its Original Network
Identifier (ON ID), its Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID), its name, and the IP
Address and UDP Port number to which the SPTS has to stream.
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Stat Muxed: the SPTS participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing group
of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
Rate Limited: the SPTS will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this SPTS, only delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this SPTS.
Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this SPTS.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the SPTS. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).
5 Continue adapting more SPTSs or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter take the
complete SPTS content into account.
Tip: When particular parameters of all SPTSs of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user interface
can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
1 In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all SPTSs of this Transrating Group.
Tips:
To sort the Transrating Group Settings table by a particular parameter, click
on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Transrating Group Settings
table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key,
and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
The Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram depicts the bit rates of the SPTSs before
transrating and the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram the bit rates after transrating.
The black line in the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram represents the total used bit
rate of the Transrating Group.
The Service table provides the legend of the diagrams together with the input (before
transrating) and output bit rates (after transrating) and average compression ratio
(expressed in percent) of the SPTSs.
Tip: To sort the Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of
the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
header.
Note: When the total bit rate of the Transrating group is higher than the sum of the
bit rates of the incoming services for this Transrating Group, the bit rates of the
outgoing SPTSs will have a larger variation that the bit rates of the incoming services.
This is a normal behavior of the DCM transrater.
Transrating Examples
Transport Stream with Multiple Transrating Groups
Statistical Re-multiplexing keeps the total bit rate of a group of services under
control. Within this group the services have Variable Bit Rates (VBR). When a
Transport Stream with VBR services is offered to for instance Scientific Atlanta's
MQAM Modulator, which builds four QAM channels from one incoming Transport
Stream, the bit rates of these QAM channels are out of control. By creating a
Transport Stream containing four Transrating Groups with the services for each
individual QAM channel, the bit rate of the Transport Stream as well as the bit rates
of the individual Transrating Groups can keep under control.
Note: More information concerning Scientific Atlanta's MQAM Modulator can be
found in the MQAM Modulator - Models D9477-1, D9477-2, D9477-3 - Installation
and Operation Guide, part number 717866.
The following illustration shows a graphical representation of a Transport Stream
containing four Transrating Groups.
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
190
Transrating
180
Group
170 150
160 140
38.5
150 130
140 120
Transrating
130 110
Group
Bitrate (Mbps)
Bitrate (Mbps)
100
38.5
120
110 90
100 80
90 70
Transrating
80 60 38.5
Group
70 50
60 40
50 30
38.5
Transrating
40 20
Group
30 10
20 0
10
0
In the example, four Selective Services type Transrating Groups should be created on
the outgoing Transport Stream each having a total bit rate of 38.5 Mbps. The total bit
rate of the Transport Stream should be set to 154 Mbps. Pass the services to the
Transrating Group belonging to one of the four QAM channels. The following
illustration depicts the tree of an outgoing Transport Stream for a MQAM Modulator
containing four 'Selective Services' type Transrating Groups.
SPTS 2 5 SPTS 2
4
4 Mbps SPTS 1
0 0
SPTS 1
4
4 Mbps
0
In the example above, a SPTS Transrating Group must be created containing the
SPTSs. The maximum bit rate of the Transrating Group should be set to 100 Mbps
and the bit rate of the individual SPTSs to 4 Mbps. The following illustration shows a
set up of a Transrating Group populated with SPTSs.
Bitrate (Mbps)
25 25
20 20
15 15
10 10
5 5
0 0
MUX
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing and
Bitrate Limiting
Stuffing
30
25
Bitrate (Mbps)
20
Total bit rate Bit Rate
15 Transrater Transport
Group: Stream:
10 27 Mbps 29 Mbps
0
Rate limited at 4 Mbps
Parameters to set
Outgoing Transport Stream, bit rate = 29 Mbps
MPTS - All Services Transrating Group, maximum bit rate = 27 Mbps
Three services Transport Stream 2
- Rate Control = Rate Limited
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps) = 4 Mbps
Five services Transport Stream 1
- Rate Control = Stat Muxed
- Min Bit Rate (Mbps) = for instance 2
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps) = for instance 5
In This Chapter
Introducing Digital Program Insertion............................................ 340
Configuring Splice Channels ............................................................ 346
Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers ................................... 353
Triggering Splicing Events Manually .............................................. 354
Creating a New IP List ....................................................................... 355
Advertising
S ale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale
(Insertion Channel) For For For For For For For For
Service
(Primary Channel)
Outgoing Service
Sale Sale S ale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale
(Output Channel) For For For For For For For For
Splicing event
duration
In contrast with this default behavior, a custom mode can be used to define the
content of the Output Channel during the splicing event by passing components of the
Primary Channel and by assigning components of the Insertion Channel to components
of the Primary Channel. During a splicing event all components not passed from the
Primary Channel to the Output Channel will be blocked and all components from the
Insertion Channel assigned to components of the Primary Channel will be spliced. This
custom mode can only by used for manual splicing or splicing triggered via a Cue
Insertion device (based on SCTE 35).
The DPI option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each service that participates into
a DPI application needs one or more Splicing licenses depending on the service
definition. A SD service takes one splicing license and a HD service takes two
licenses. DPI licenses are occupied as soon as Splicing Channels are created.
Notes:
For Digital Program Insertion the DCM requires one or more Co-Processor cards
and free Splicing licenses.
When a Primary Channel contains a SD service and the Insertion Channel a HD
service, the SD/HD parameter of the Primary Channel service must be set to HD.
Such a Splicing Channel consumes two Splicing licenses. The procedure to change
the SD/HD parameter of a service can be found in topic To Select the Service
Definition.
Splicing two video components within the same channel is not allowed. When
the Primary Channel provides two video components, then the custom mode
must be used to assign one video component and to block the other video
components.
During a splicing event, black frames might occur, this can be solved by
increasing the transrating delay. More information can be found in topic
Transrating Board Settings on page 302.
DISCLAIMER
Splicing programs without transrating can lead to big bit rate variations on the
spliced program. Splicing without transrating does not give bit rate control over
the spliced program.
IP Network
AD-Server 1
Time Server
AD-Server 1 (NTP)
Advertising
Advertising
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion Service + Cue Messages DCM
Service + Cue Messages
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion
Principle
When a DCM is integrated into a SCTE 30 based DPI application, a certain time
before the In-Point of a splicing event the AD-Server informs the DCM about the
service that must be spliced (Primary Channel), the advertising (Insertion Channel),
start time of the splicing event, and duration using a Splice Request message. At start
time of the splicing event, the AD-Server streams the advertising to the DCM via an
ASI port or GbE port. The Co-Processor card of the DCM processes both streams to
achieve a seamless transition between the Primary Channel and the Insertion Channel.
After a particular time, equal to the duration parameter, a seamless Insertion to
Primary Channel substitution is performed.
Notes:
An Insertion to Primary Channel substitution can also be triggered by an additional
Splice Request message.
The information in the Cue Messages inserted by a CUE Insertion device into the
incoming transport stream of the DCM (SCTE 35 based) is redirected to all
connected AD-Servers for the specific channel. This information can be used by
the AD-Servers to determine the parameters of the Splice Request messages.
When the Primary Channel is scrambled by the DCM, the insertion channel will
also be scrambled during the Splicing Event Duration.
Before messages can be sent between the AD-Server and the DCM a TCP/IP socket
must be set up; this is a client/server connection with the AD-server client and the
DCM device server. Therefore the AD-Server needs the knowledge of the IP-address
of the used Ethernet port of the DCM device. For each service with splicing
opportunities, a splice channel must be created.
Time Synchronization
Due to the time differences between the AD Servers and the DCM and the
unpredictability of the delay on TCP/IP messages, time synchronization between the
AD Servers and DCM is required to achieve a very accurate splicing. To keep the AD
Servers and the DCM synchronized, the Network Time Protocol (NTP) can be used.
The DCM (NTP client) can be synchronized with one of the AD Servers (NTP server)
or the DCM and AD servers can be synchronized with a separate Time-Server. The
procedure to synchronize the DCM with a Time-Server using NTP can be found in
topic Synchronizing with a Time-Server on page 42.
Service +
Cue Messages
Service or
Advertising Advertising
DCM
Principle
A certain time before starting a splicing event, the Cue Insertion device of the MPEG
encoder inserts a Splice Insert Cue Message into the Transport Stream containing the
splicing event start time and splicing event duration. At the splicing event start time,
the co-processor of the DCM processes both streams to achieve a seamless transition
between the Primary Channel and the associated Insertion Channel.
After a particular time, equal to the duration parameter, a seamless Insertion to
Primary Channel substitution is performed.
Notes:
When the Splice_Immediate flag of the Splice Insert Cue Message is set, the DCM
will start the splice event directly after receiving the Cue Message.
Instead of using the duration parameter, an Insertion to Primary substitution can
be triggered by an additional Splice Insert Cue Message.
Before a splice substitution can be performed, a splice channel must be created and
the DCM requires the knowledge of the service for the insertion channel.
Service
Service or
Advertising
DCM
Advertising
Before a splice substitution can be performed, a splice channel must be created and
the DCM requires the knowledge of the service for the insertion channel.
5 In the DPI Settings table, modify the following parameters to configure a DPI
channel:
a Set the Output Channel check box to define a splice channel for this service.
b In the Output Channel - Name box of the service in question, enter a name to
identify the Splice Channel.
Note: When the splicing events for this channel are triggered by an
AD-Server, the name entered in the Output Channel - Name box must match
the name given by the AD-Server.
c In the Output Channel - Mode drop down box, select one of the following
modes:
Off: DPI is switched off.
SCTE-30 / 35: splicing events are triggered by an AD-Server.
SCTE-35 Only: splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device.
Manual: splicing events are triggered via the web browser user interface of
the DCM.
SCTE-35 Only (Custom): splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion
device and the actions defined under Custom PID Mapping will be
followed.
Manual (Custom): splicing events are triggered via the web browser user
interface of the DCM system and the actions defined under Custom PID
Mapping will be followed.
Note: The Insertion Channel parameters are not applicable if splicing events
are triggered by an AD-Server (Output Channel - Mode = SCTE-30 / 35).
d In the Output Channel - PMT Mode drop down box, select on of the
following modes:
Follow Insertion: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Insertion Channel.
Follow Primary: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Primary Channel.
e In the Insertion Channel - Card box, enter the slot position of the board to
which the port of the incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
f In the Insertion Channel - Port box, enter the number of the port to which the
incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
g In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port type.
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
h In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast IP
address to which the source device streams.
Note: The Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address parameter is only
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
i In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
port that enters the Transport Stream the Insertion channel belongs to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the
Insertion Channel enters the device via an ASI port.
j In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the Insertion
Channel.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Notes:
When the Output Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-35 Only (Custom) or
to Manual (Custom) the sub page to define custom PID mapping entries can be
accessed by pressing the arrow that appears in the PIDs column.
As soon as a splice channel is defined for a service (Output Channel check box is
set) one or two DPI license, depending on the service definition (SD or HD), is
(are) consumed. The availability of DPI licenses for the splice channel is shown in
the License column.
The Status column represents the status of the splice channel, viz.: Primary or
Insertion.
When the Insertion Channel is present at the input, the Service Name of the
Insertion Channel together with the Original Network identifier (ON-ID) and
Transport Stream Identifier (TS-ID) of the Transport Stream containing the
Insertion Channel is displayed in the Info box.
When an Insertion Channel is defined for a particular output channel and the
Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel is not yet present at the GbE
port, a Transport Stream reservation is created.
After entering the Apply command button, all Splice Channels with Output
Channel - Mode equal to Manual are added to the DPI Start/Stop table.
Tip:
When particular parameters of all splicing channels on a particular GbE port must be
changed to similar values, the Update All Channels function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following procedure explains how to use this function.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the corresponding port, right-click on this
port, and point to View Port Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page of the corresponding port is displayed.
3 Click on the DPI link.
Result: The DPI sub page with the DPI settings of the output channels on the
corresponding port is displayed.
4 In the Update all channels table, enter the desired value in the box or select the
desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for
all channels of the corresponding port.
5 Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the DPI Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the DPI Settings table can still be changed if necessary.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: The Custom PID Mapping table is also accessible via the DPI Settings table
containing all outgoing services belonging to a particular GbE port.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: A new entry is added in the table.
7 In the Action drop down box, select Pass From Main.
8 In the Input PID Main box, enter the PID of the component that must be passed.
9 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Assigning Components from the Insertion Channel to Components of the Primary Channel
Perform the following steps to assign components from the Insertion Channel to
components of the Primary Channel.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View sub page
after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream, which
includes the service for which components must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI settings of the services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream
are displayed.
5 In the DPI Settings table, point to the arrow in the PIDs column of the service for
which components must be assigned.
Result: The Custom PID Mapping table is displayed.
Tip: The Custom PID Mapping table is also accessible via the DPI Settings table
containing all outgoing services belonging to a particular GbE port.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: A new entry is added in the table.
In This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................................... 358
Introducing Conditional Access System ......................................... 360
Steps To Take....................................................................................... 375
Allowing Scrambling for Services .................................................... 378
Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters .......................... 380
Configuring the Access Criteria........................................................ 409
Scrambling Control............................................................................. 427
Introduction
General
A DCM is provided with a DVB Simulcrypt compliant scrambler, which is designed
to meet the DVB Simulcrypt conditional access specifications ETSI TS 103 197. There
are many Conditional Access Systems in use today and the goal of the DCM devices
is to integrate the devices in as many CA Systems as possible. The operator using the
DCM has a wide choice of Conditional Access Systems. To achieve this
interoperability, a common set of protocols and interfaces between scramblers and
CA System is required.
The scrambler of the DCM works on a per license basis, meaning each service that
must be scrambled or each service that contains components that must be scrambled
needs a Scrambling license. For more information concerning licenses, please refer to
topic Licensing on page 17.
Note: Scrambling is performed by the Co-Processor Card that is plugged on a GbE
Interface Card or ASI Interface Card. When a service or component in an outgoing
Transport Stream must be scrambled, the interface card streaming this outgoing
Transport Stream should be populated by a Co-Processor Card.
(P)SI
ECM Generator
Generator
Access Criteria
Control Word
SCGs
(P)SI Tables
ECMs
Control
Control
Word
Word Simulcrypt (P)SI DCM
Synchronizer Generator
Generator
Control Word
(P)SI
Tables
ECMs
MUX
TS Scrambler TS
Transport Stream
Database
EMM
Generator
Private Data
Generator
Subscriber
Management
System
A CAS system combines scrambling of picture, sound, or data services with a specific
Scrambling/Descrambling key management system. Scrambling is the process that
uses a cryptographic algorithm to make services unintelligible for non-authorized
subscribers.
CW
To increase the security of a CA System the Control Word used to scramble and
descramble services changes periodically (typically every 10 seconds). The duration
of scrambling by one Control Word is named Crypto Period. Control Words, which
are typically 64 bits long, are generated by a Control Word Generator (CWG) and
requested by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer (SCS).
Transport Transport Stream with Transport
Scrambler Descrambler
Stream Scrambled Services Stream
CW
?
CWG
SCS
CW
Control Words cannot be delivered from the transmitter to the receiver site in the
clear, they need to be encrypted. The algorithm used to encrypt the Control Word is
unique to each CA System and implemented in a secure device of the descrambler
and uses the smart card of the customers Conditional Access Module (CAM).
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
Note: For more information concerning the Event Information Scheduler, please refer
to topic Event Information Scheduler on page 365.
The Simulcrypt Synchronizer extracts the Access Criteria from the information
(named Scrambling Control Group) received from the Event Information Scheduler.
The synchronizer sends this Access Criteria together with the Control Word for the
corresponding Crypto Period to the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG).
The Entitlement Control Message Generator encrypts both the Access Criteria and
the Control Word using a particular cryptographic algorithm with a specific Service
Key. This encrypted data is encapsulated into an Entitlement Control Message
(ECM) and sent to the Simulcrypt Synchronizer.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Stream Scrambler Transport
ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
A certain time before the first Crypto Period for this event begins, the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer starts sending ECMs for this event at regular times to the multiplexer
(typically every 200 msec). This start time is necessary to give the descrambler time
to decrypt the encrypted Control Word and Access Criteria. The multiplexer
multiplexes this stream of ECMs with the outgoing Transport Stream. When the
event begins, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer sends the Control Word to the scrambler,
which starts scrambling the service(s) associated with this event.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
Before the end of the Crypto Period, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer requests a new
Control Word from the Control Word Generator, sends this new Control Word
together with the Access Criteria to the ECMG, and receives a new ECM for this
event from the ECM Generator. This new generated ECM is multiplexed in the
outgoing Transport Stream. When the Crypto Period is ended, the new Control
Word is sent to the scrambler, which starts scrambling the service(s) using the new
Control Word. This reiterates for every Crypto Period until the end of the event.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Stream Scrambler Transport
ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
EMMG
EMMs
Incoming Outgoing
Transport
MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
The EMM Generator also generates EMMs with encrypted keys to renew the service
and management keys used by the scrambler, and EMMs with instructions for the
descrambler (e.g. clear areas of smart card, disable set top boxes, etc.).
The EMM Generator offers the EMMs to the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream
or via the EMMG to MUX interface (TCP or UDP). When the EMMs are offered via
network communication, the multiplexer take cares of the EMM stream generation.
This EMM stream is multiplexed to the outgoing Transport Stream.
Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
To start a scrambling event the Event Information Scheduler provides the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer with a Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning message. A SCG
provisioning message contains a list of services and/or Elementary Streams that
must be scrambled at the same time with the same Control Word and a list with ECM
Groups for which ECMs must be generated. An ECM Group contains the necessary
information, like Super_Cas_ID 2, ECM_ID 3, and Access Criteria, to bind an ECM
stream to a Conditional Access Provider.
To stop a scrambling event the EIS sends a SCG provisioning message update to the
Simulcrypt Synchronizer. The ECM Group for the event of which scrambling must
be stopped is removed from the SCG provisioning message. The following
illustration shows a SCG provisioning message.
SCG Provisioning
Message
Service ID xxx
.
.
.
SCG ID Components ID xxx
.
.
.
.
Activation Time
1 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
2 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
3 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
4 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM
5 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
Groups
6 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
.
.
y Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM ID
PSI/SI Generator
When EMM and ECM streams are added to a Transport Stream, the Program Specific
Information (PSI) and the Service Information (SI) must be updated.
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors in the Program Map Table (PMT). The CA
descriptors in the PMT point to the Packet Identifier (PID) of the ECM(s).
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors in the Conditional Access Table (CAT). The
CA descriptors in the CAT point to the Packet Identifiers (PIDs) of the EMMs.
The PSI/SI Generator (named PSIG) provides the multiplexer with the appropriate
PSI and SI tables for the outgoing Transport Stream.
PSIG EMMG
EMMs
(P)SI Tables
Incoming Outgoing
MUX
Transport Scrambler Transport
Stream Stream
P(SI) Tables
PSIG ECMs
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
The PSI/SI Generator inside the DCM responsible for the PSI and the SI table
generation and adaptation for the re-multiplexer functionality is also responsible for
the PMT and CAT adaptation for the scrambling functionality.
When a third party PSI/SI Generator is connected to the DCM, particular tables like
PAT, PMT, and CAT generated by the external connected PSIG overrule the tables
generated by the PSIG of the DCM.
Note: The DCM cannot update CA descriptors in a PMT if the PSI/SI information is
generated by an external PSIG. Therefore the Type parameter of the descriptor rule
must be set to Do Not Insert. For more information, please refer to topic Adding,
Changing, or Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules on page 392.
EMMs
Private Data
(P)SI Tables
Incoming Outgoing
MUX
Transport Scrambler Transport
Stream Stream
P(SI) Tables
PSIG ECMs
CWG CW
SCS
CW
DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)
ECMs
EIS ECMG
The multiplexer of the DCM inserts this stream into the outgoing Transport Stream.
Note: The Private Data Generator uses the same interface as the Entitlement
Management Message Generator.
Scrambling levels
Scrambling can be done on two different levels, namely: Elementary Stream Level
scrambling and Service Level scrambling. The following list describes these
scrambling levels:
Elementary Stream Level Scrambling: Each component of a service may be
scrambled by a separate Control Word. For example, video and audio may be
scrambled with a separated Control Word. This is useful in multilingual systems
where a premium is charged for a second audio in a different language. In this
case, each component or elementary stream is associated with its own stream of
ECM messages.
EMMG
Input TS Output TS
EMMs
PMT PMT
Transport Stream
MUX
Video PID Video PID
(P)SI Tables Scrambler
Audio PID CA Descriptor
PSIG ECMs
ECM PID
ES Video
CW Audio PID
ES Audio CWG CW
SCS
ES Video (scrambled)
(...,AC,...)
DCM ES Audio
CW/AC
ECMs
ECM PID
ECMG
When scrambling at the elementary stream level, all Elementary Streams within the
service are scrambled using different Control Words. One ECM is required for each
Elementary Stream. The CA descriptors are inserted after each elementary stream
within the PMT.
Input TS Output TS
EMMs
PMT PMT
MUX
Video PID CA Descriptor
Transport Stream Scrambler
Audio PID ECM PID
ECMs
Video PID
ES Video
CW Audio PID
ES Audio CWG CW
SCS
ES Video (scrambled)
CW/AC
ECMs
ECM PID
ECMG
When scrambling at the service level, all Elementary Streams within the service are
scrambled using the same Control Word. Only one ECM is required for each service.
The CA descriptor is inserted near the top of the PMT.
Note: Elementary Stream Level Scrambling and Service Level Scrambling can be
mixed within the scrambler but not within the same service.
Simulcrypt Scrambling
Simulcrypt scrambling is a scrambling method whereby a single Transport Stream
contains ECMs and EMMs from different Conditional Access systems. This enables
different CA decoder populations to receive and correctly decode the same video and
audio streams.
Input TS Output TS
EMMG1 EMMG2 EMMGn
PMT PMT
MUX
Audio PID
Transport Stream Scrambler ECM 1 PID
CW/ACn
CW/AC1
CW/AC2
(..., ECMgrp1(...,AC1),
ECMgrp2(...,AC2)
ECMn
ECMs CSA(ES Audio, CW)
ECM 1 PID
ECM n PID
EMM 1 PID
EIS
EMM 2 PID
EMM n PID
Timing Parameters
When the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) triggers the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
the start of a new Conditional Access (CA) event using a Scrambling Control Group
(SCG ID 1) provisioning message, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer request a Control
Word (CW 1) from the Control Word Generator. Once the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
has received the Control Word from the CW Generator, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
sends the Control Word together with the Access Criteria and ECM ID extracted from
the Scrambling Control Group provisioning message to the ECM Generator.
The ECM Generator encrypts the Control Word and Access Criteria and encapsulates
this data into an ECM. The ECM Generator sends this ECM to the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer. A certain time before (t1-t2) starting the CA event (Activation Time)
the Simulcrypt Synchronizer start sending ECMs for the first Crypto Period at regular
times to the Multiplexer.
Transition Start Delay 4 (t1-t2): represents the amount of time between the start of
the first Crypto Period following a clear to scrambled transition, and the start of
the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
The multiplexer multiplexes these ECMs directly into the outgoing Transport Stream.
At the same time a CA descriptor containing the ECM PID is inserted into the
Program Map Table (PMT) of the Transport stream.
SCG SCG
ID 1 ID 1
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM ECM
(CW 1) (CW 2) (CW 3) (CW L)
ECM
Transmission t1 t3 t4 tL+1
Crypto
Period CP 1 CP 2 CP L
t2 t5 tL
The Transition Start Delay must match the time the descrambler needs to decapsulate
the ECM PID from the PMT and to decrypt the Control Word and Access Criteria. At
the begin (t2) of the first Crypto Period (CP 1) the set top box starts descrambling the
scrambled service using CW 1.
4A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to the
start of theCrypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall be
broadcast ahead of this time. Only a negative Transition Start Delay can be used.
A certain time (t3-t5) before the end of the running Crypto Period (CP 1) the SCS
stops transmitting ECMs attached to this CP and a certain time (t4-t5) before the next
Crypto Period (CP 2) the SCS starts transmitting ECMs for CP 2.
Stop Delay 5 (t3-t5): represents the amount of time between the end of a Crypto
Period, and the end of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
Start Delay 6 (t4-t5): represents the amount of time between the start of a Crypto
Period, and the start of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a SCG provisioning message update
from the Event Information Scheduler indicating the end of the running CA event,
the synchronizer extend the last Crypto Period until the end of the period match the
end of the activation time extract from the SCG provisioning message update.
Once the activation time (tl) is reached the set top box stops descrambling the service.
The Simulcrypt Synchronizer stops transmitting ECMs attached to this last Crypto
Period at time (tl+1).
Transition Stop Delay (tl-tl+1): this parameter represents the amount of time
between the end of last Crypto Period preceding a scrambled to clear transition,
and the end of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a SCG provisioning message containing
another Access Criteria for the service(s), the synchronizer stops sending ECMs
containing the previous Access Criteria at time t6 in the last Crypto Period and starts
sending ECMs with the new Access Criteria at time (t7).
SCG
ID 2
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM ECM
(CW L) (CW L+1) (CW L+2) (CW L+3)
ECM
Transmission t6 t7
Crypto
Period CP L-1 CP L CP L+1 CP L+2
t8
Activation Time
SCG ID 2
5 A positive stop delay parameter means that the end of the ECM broadcast shall be delayed
with respect to the end of the Crypto Period. A negative stop delay parameter means that the
ECM broadcast shall be ended ahead of time.
6 A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to the
start of the Crypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall be
broadcast ahead of this time.
AC Start Delay 7 (t7-t8): represents the amount of time between the start of the
first Crypto Period following a change in the Access Criteria and the start of the
broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
AC Stop Delay 8 (t6-t8): represents the amount of time between the end of the
lastCrypto Period preceding a change in Access Criteria, and the end of the
broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
During the connection setup between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer and the
Entitlement Control Message Generator, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a
Channel Status Message containing particular timing parameters. When timing
parameters are missing or inaccurate, ROSAs SCS Configurator allows overruling
these parameters.
When a subscriber tunes into a scrambled service in a particular Crypto Period, the
scrambler is not able to scramble the service during the rest of this Crypto period
because he has only the Control Word for the next period. To solve this problem, an
Entitlement Control Message (ECM) can be provided with more than one Control
Word. The most Conditional Access Systems allow 1 or 2 Control Words in an ECM,
viz. the Control Word of the current Crypto Period and the Control Word of the next
period.
SCG
ID 1
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM
(CW 1-2) (CW 2-3) (CW 3-4)
ECM
Transmission
Crypto
Period CP 1 CP 2 CP 3
Activation Time
7 A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to the
start of the Crypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall be
broadcast ahead of this time.
8 A positive stop delay parameter means that the end of the ECM broadcast shall be delayed
with respect to the end of the Crypto Period. A negative stop delay parameter means that the
ECM broadcast shall be ended ahead of time.
Steps To Take
Before the scrambling functionality of a DCM can be used, a number of actions must
be completed.
Installing the ROSA NMS Software on a Computer
The ROSA NMS software must be installed on a computer. Fore more information
concerning the ROSA NMS software, please refer to the ROSA Network Management
System Users Guide. Once the ROSA Software is installed the following drivers
must be installed within ROSA NMS. This allows the computer running the ROSA
NMS software to participate in the Conditional Access System:
- When Private Data components are offered via a Transport Stream, these
components must be passed to this outgoing Transport Stream. The
procedure to pass such components can be found in topic Passing and
Removing Unreferenced Components on page 226.
Configuring the Simulcrypt Controller of the DCM
The following actions must be performed using the SCS Configurator.
- The Streaming parameter of the Transport Stream must be set to Active. The
procedure to change the Streaming parameter is described in topic Activating
or Stopping Streaming on page 282.
Starting and Stopping Scrambling
Clear to scrambling or scrambling to clear transitions of services can be performed
using the Scrambling Control Task. Fore more information please refer to topic
Scrambling on page 427.
6 In the Scrambling drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Scrambling allowed: scrambling is allowed for the service or for components
belonging to the service.
No Scrambling: scrambling is not allowed for the service or for components
belonging to the service.
Note: The Scrambling drop down box is only applicable if the interface card of the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service is passed is provided with a
Co-Processor Card.
7 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Tip: Information concerning the other parameters on the Service - Service sub page
can be found in topic Changing Service Parameters on page 272.
Note: If no or no more Scrambling Licenses are available, a warning appears after
pressing the Apply command button. More information concerning Scrambling
Licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 17.
The SCS Configurator allows configuring the scrambling specific parameters and
assigning the following CA interfaces:
Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) interfaces
Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) interfaces
Event Information Scheduler (EIS) interfaces
Status Description
Icon
The connection between the DCM and the ECM Generator is closed.
The connection between the ECM Generator and the DCM is in channel
establishing state.
The channel between the ECM Generator and the DCM is open.
The DCM waits for a connection from the Event Information Scheduler, the EMM
Generator, or the PSI Generator.
The DCM waits for a channel setup from the Event Information Scheduler, the
EMM Generator, or the PSI Generator.
The channel between the DCM and the Channel Event Information Scheduler, the
EMM Generator, or the PSI Generator is open
TS
DCM TS + ECMs
EMMs
CW/AC
ECM
Generator
The Simulcrypt Synchronizer also requires the knowledge of the mapping between
the Super CAS ID, which is a concatenation of the CA System identifier and the CA
Subsystem identifier, and the communication parameters. Once the channel is
established and the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) triggers the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer to request ECMs from the ECM Generator, an ECM stream is set up.
The number of ECM streams that can be set up between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
and the ECM Generator within one channel is limited and depends on the CA
System.
Load Balancing
For backup and/or load sharing purposes several ECM Generators can
be connected to a DCM. The priority assigned to the communication
channel determines if the ECM Generators are used in load balancing or in backup
mode. When the channel priorities of the ECM Generators are equal, the ECM
Generators will work in load sharing mode. When the priority differs, the ECM
Generator with highest priority (= lowest number) acts as Main ECM Generator and
the one with the lowest priority as backup
Whenever DCM needs to set up a new ECM stream, the DCM will select a connected
ECM Generator. Then it will select the ECMG connection with the highest priority
that has available ECM capacity. If the generators have an equal priority, the one
with available ECM capacity and the least open streams will be selected. When the
load on an ECMG decreases, ECM streams will not be automatically spread over
equal priority ECMG.
As soon as channel connection with an ECMG is broken, or the ECMG runs out of
ECMG capacity, a new ECMG is selected according to the criteria above.
The ECMG working modes can be combined, for instance two generators with the
same priority (load sharing mode) and one with a lower priority (backup mode).
Note: If no capacity is available, no ECM stream will be se up and the service(s) can
not be scrambled.
Examples
Load Sharing
Suppose an application with two ECM Generators (IP A and B) with same priority
(prio 1) and with a capacity of 10 streams. During stream setup, the streams are
spread over the ECM Generators as follows:
IP A: streams 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
IP B: streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
When the DCM stops scrambling a number of services (corresponding streams 5, 7,
and 9), no stream balancing is done.
IP A: streams 1, 3
IP B: streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
ECMG backup
In our application, ECMG IP A has priority 1 and IP B priority 2. The streams are
shared as follows:
IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams
If IP A fails, IP B takes over the load
IP A: streams
IP B: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
If IP A restores:
IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams
IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams 11
Load Sharing and ECMG Backup
Suppose an application with three ECM Generators (IP A, B, and C) with a capacity of
10 streams. IP A and B have priority 1 and IP C priority 2. During stream setup, the
streams are spread over the ECM Generators as follows:
3 In ECMG Name box, enter the name of the ECM Generator. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the ECM Generator in the CA system. A
name of max 20 characters can be given to an ECM Generator.
4 In the ECMG Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
- Standard: DVB Simulcrypt
- Irdeto M_Crypt: (DVB Simulcrypt) creates streams even if no ECMs are
requested and overrules the Access Criteria with a fixed format containing the
Original Network Identifier (ON_ID), the Transport Stream Identifier
(TS_ID), and the Service Identifier (SID).
- Nagra NagraVision: (DVB Simulcrypt) overrules the Access Criteria with the
ECM identifier.
5 In the ECM PID Source drop down box, select the desired ECM PID source, viz.:
- ECM ID: the ECM Identifier from the ECM Group in the SCG Provisioning
message is used to determine the ECM Packet Identifier.
- Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the ECM packet identifier (PID)
from the list of free PIDs.
Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the ECM PID determines, can
be limited by defining limits (ECM PID Lower Limit and ECM PID Upper Limit).
6 In the CA SystemID box, enter the Conditional Access System identifier. This
identifier is defined in table 3 CA_system_ID of ETR 162 and used to indicate the
type of CA system applicable for the associated ECM stream. Contact your CA
vendor for more information.
7 In the CA SubsystemID box, enter the identifier of the Conditional Access sub
system. This parameter is used to differentiate multiple ECM Generators from
the same CA vender in the CA application. Contact your CA vendor for more
information.
8 Click the Add command button to add a connection entry in the Connections
table.
Result: A table entry is added.
9 In the Priority box of this entry, enter a channel priority number to determine the
ECMG working mode. More information concerning the ECMG working mode
can be found in topic Introduction on page 384.
10 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the ECM Generator. The octets of
the IP address must be separated by dots.
11 In the Port box, enter the port number of the ECM Generator used for this
channel.
12 When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer should determine the channel identifier for
this channel, the Automatic Channel ID Selection check box must be set.
Otherwise clear this check box and enter the channel identifier in the Channel ID
box. A number between 0 and 65535 is allowed.
Notes:
Overrule Transition Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time
between the end of last Crypto Period preceding a scrambled to clear transition,
and the end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the
start of a Crypto Period, and the start of broadcasting the ECM attached to this
period.
Overrule Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the
end of a Crypto Period, and the end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this
period.
AC Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the start
of the first Crypto Period following a change in the Access Criteria and the start of
broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule AC Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between
the end of the last Crypto Period preceding a change in Access Criteria, and the
end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Repetition Period: this parameter represents the amount of time
between two ECM packets at the output of the scrambler.
Overrule Max. Number of Streams: this parameter represents the maximum
number of simultaneous opened streams supported by an ECMG on a channel. If
the ECMG returns 0 no maximum is known, meaning the scrambler will not limit
the amount of streams on a channel and no ECMs will be requested from the
ECMG backup when maximum capacity is reached on the ECMG. To make sure
an ECMG is not overloaded, the maximum number of streams can be overruled.
The following table shows the minimum, maximum, and default values of these
parameters:
Introduction
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors are data structures used to carry CA specific
information for services or Elementary Streams. The DCM devices are able to update
PMTs with CA descriptors according to the user configurable CA descriptor rules.
The SCS Configurator allows configuring CA descriptor rules and applying these
rules to descriptors.
Note: When the DCM scrambles a service or components within a service, CA
descriptors in the PMT are sorted using the values of the ECM PIDs to which the CA
descriptors apply, CA descriptors with lowest value come first. When a scrambled
service is passed from input to output of the DCM, the CA descriptor order is not
changed.
5 In the Name box, enter a name to facilitate the identification of the descriptor rule
in the application.
6 In the Type drop down box, select the rule type:
- Add Private Data rule type: add private data to the standard descriptor.
- Do Not Insert rule type: no standard descriptor insertion. This setting prevents
updating the CA descriptors in the PMT by the DCM if the PSI/SI
information is generated by an external connected PSIG.
Notes:
- Both the Insert drop down box and Private Data [Hex] box are grayed, if the
rule type is set to Do Not Insert.
- Private data is CA Vendor proprietary.
7 In the Insert drop down box, select the insertion level mode for the private data
part.
- According to EIS: the Event Information Scheduler determines the insertion
level.
- At ES Level: the insertion is performed at Elementary Stream level (even if
Service Level Scrambling is defined by the Event Information Scheduler).
8 In the Private data box, enter the private date.
Note: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [hex] box must be even.
9 In the Applies to ECM ID(s) box, point to the Add command button.
Result: The Add ID dialog displays.
10 In the Enter ID box enter the ECM ID to which the CA descriptor rule must be
applied.
11 Press the OK command button to confirm.
12 Repeat step 9 up to 11 until all ECM IDs are added.
13 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Close command button to abort
the operation.
Result: The descriptor rule is displayed on the Descriptor Rules tab of the GUI.
Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the PMTs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams.
When no IDs are added into the Applies to ECM ID(s) box, the descriptor rule is
applied to all ECMs. Since only one rule with empty Applies to ECM ID(s) box is
allowed, this rule will overrule the standard CA descriptor.
When IDs are added, the rule is only applied to the ECM IDs appearing in the
Applies to ECM ID(s) box. Only one rule can be effective for a certain ECM ID.
ECM IDs added to the Applies to ECM ID(s) box must be unique over all
descriptor rules for a certain ECM Generator.
- ECM IDs can be removed by selecting the IDs and pointing to the Remove
command button. To select consecutive rules, click on the first rule that must
be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule
that must be removed. To select rules that are not consecutive, press and hold
down [CTRL] key, and then click each rule that must be removed.
- Deselecting an ID can be done by holding down the [CTRL] key and pointing
to the ID.
TS
DCM TS + EMMs
EMMs
EMM
Generator
The EMM Generator presents the EMM stream to the Multiplexer using an ASI
Transport Stream or via a TCP connection. To establish communication over
Ethernet between the EMM Generator and the DCM a TCP connection has to be
made followed by a channel set up. Therefore the EMM Generator requires the IP
address and the listening port used by the DCM for this connection. When the
channel set up is complete a stream is established to transfer the EMMs from the
EMM Generator to the DCM.
The connection between the EMM Generator and the DCM supports both the TCP
and UDP protocol for streaming. In particular applications the UDP protocol is more
useful (less overhead) and in other applications the TCP Protocol (more robust).
Note: If the EMMs are offered using an ASI stream, the ASI stream must be connected
to an ASI input of the DCM and passed to the output.
3 In the EMMG Name box, enter a name for the EMM Generator. This name acts
as a label to facilitate the identification of the EMM Generator in the CA system.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the listening port used by the DCM to
establish the TCP connection with the EMM Generator.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by another
EMM Generator, an Event Information Scheduler or a PSI Generator.
5 When the UDP protocol is used for data streaming, set the Use UDP Port check
box and enter the UDP port number, which is used by the DCM to receive UDP
packets, in the Use UDP Port box.
6 In the EMM PID Source drop down box, select one of the following items:
- Stream ID: the stream identifier
- Channel ID: the channel identifier of the connection
- Data ID: the private data stream identifier
- Packet ID: the packet identifier. This selection is only useful when the EMMs
are in transport stream packet format (EMM Section Grouping check box is
cleared).
- Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the EMM PID from the list of free
PIDs.
Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the EMM PID determines, can
be limited by defining limits (EMM PID Lower Limit and EMM PID Upper Limit).
7 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth within the outgoing
Transport Stream allocated to the packets containing EMMs.
Note: This parameter is used for bandwidth negotiation purposes with the EMMG.
When the bandwidth of the EMM stream exceeds this parameter, an error message is
sent to the EMM Generator and an alarm is triggered in ROSA NMS. No packets
will be dropped.
8 Set or clear the EMM Section Grouping check box.
- EMM Section Grouping check box is set: packets are filled with multiple
sections within one EMM provision (only if the section is smaller than the
packet).
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
- EMM Section Grouping check box is clear: the packet is filled with one
section per packet.
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
Sections Packets
Sections
Packets
Stuffing
Header payload
9 Press the OK command button to confirm.
Introduction
The DCM devices are able to update CATs with CA descriptors according to the user
configurable CA descriptor rules. The SCS Configurator allows configuring
descriptor rules and applying these rules to descriptors.
Note: In a CAT, CA descriptors are sorted using the values of the EMM data PIDs to
which the CA descriptors applies, CA descriptors with lowest value come first.
5 In the Name box, enter a name to identify the descriptor in the application.
6 In the Private Data [Hex] box, enter the private data.
Result: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [Hex] box must be even.
7 In the Applies to Data ID(s) box, point to the Add command button.
Result: The Add ID dialog is displayed.
8 In the Enter ID box, enter the EMM data ID to which the CA descriptor rule must
be applied.
9 Press the OK command button to confirm.
10 Repeat step 8 up to 10 until all EMM data IDs are added.
11 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Close command button to abort
the operation.
Result: The descriptor rule is displayed on the Descriptor Rules tab of the GUI.
Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the CATs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams if:
- no CA descriptor rule is configured
or
- a CA descriptor rule is configured with empty Applies to Data ID(s) box
The EMM IDs added to the Applies to Data ID(s) box must be unique over all
descriptor rules for a certain EMM Generator.
TS
DCM TS
SCGs
Event
Information
Scheduler
To set up a TCP connection between the Event Information Scheduler and the DCM,
the EIS requires the knowledge of the IP address and TCP port of the DCM used to
establish the connection.
Note: ROSA NMS, Scientific Atlantas Network Management System, can serve as
Event Information Scheduler if both the AC Management Component and
Scrambling Control Task are installed. The computer running the ROSA software
obtains the required knowledge during the device mapping process.
3 In the EIS Name box, enter a name for the Event Information Scheduler. This
name acts as a label to identify the Event Information Scheduler in the CA
System.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the listening port used by the DCM to
establish the TCP connection with the Event Information Scheduler.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by an EMM
Generator or a PSI Generator.
5 In the EIS Type drop down box, select on of the following items:
- SA Specific: the Event Information Scheduler of ROSA NMS
- General: a third party Event Information Scheduler
Note: Only one Scientific Atlanta EIS can be assigned to a DCM.
6 When the Crypto Period parameter encapsulated into Scrambling Control
Groups are missing or inaccurate, this parameter can be overruled by setting the
Overrule Recommended CP Duration check box. In the box that becomes
editable after setting the check box, enter the desired Crypto Period.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm.
Note: More information concerning the ECMG parameters can be found in subtopic
To Assign an EIS Interface earlier in this topic.
PSI/SI Generators
Introduction
The main function of the PSI/SI Generator (so called PSIG) is to provide the
multiplexer with the necessary Program Specific Information (PSI) / Service
Information (SI) tables for the outgoing Transport Stream. The PSI/SI Generator
receives its primary data from the Event Information Scheduler and supplementary
data from the C(P)SI Generator.
TS
DCM TS
PSI tables
PSI
Generator
The connection between the PSI/SI Generator and the multiplexer of the DCM is a
client/server connection with the PSI/SI Generator the client and the DCM the
server. To establish communication between the PSI/SI Generator and the DCM a
TCP connection have to be made followed with a channel set up and a stream set up.
3 In the PSIG Name box, enter a name for the PSI/SI Generator. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the PSI/SI Generator in the CA System.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the TCP port used by the DCM to
establish connection with the PSI/SI Generator.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by an EMM
Generator or an Event Information Scheduler.
5 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth for the PSI/SI stream
that can be used between the DCM and the PSI/SI Generator.
6 In the PSIG Type drop down box, select on of the following items:
SA Specific: the PSIG of ROSA NMS
General: a third party PSIG
Note: Only one Scientific Atlanta PSIG can be assigned to a DCM.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm.
General Settings
To Change the Number Format
This allows you to change the number format. You can change the number format
from decimal to hexadecimal or vice versa.
1 In the Settings menu, move to NumberFormat.
2 Select the Hex or Dec NumberFormat.
- Hex: to view the values as hexadecimal values.
- Dec: to view the values as decimal values.
WARNING:
After executing a Clear & Reload TS Model upload, services or components with
Access Criteria assignments loose these assignments, meaning scrambled services
or components become clear.
Note: During an upload action only the Transport Stream model is uploaded with:
- the Transport Streams containing services for which scrambling is allowed
- the services for which scrambling is allowed
The corresponding Access Criteria, Access Criteria assignments, and Scrambling
Control Groups (scrambling configuration) are not uploaded.
To Set up the TS Model by Uploading the TS Model from the DCM Device(s)
The following steps explain how to upload the Transport Stream model from the
DCM device(s).
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Select TransportStreams to upload the model for multiple Transport Streams or a
particular Transport Stream to upload the model for this single Transport Stream.
3 Right-Click and point to Load Model From Device(s).
Result: The Load Model from Devices dialog is displayed.
4 Set the Overwrite the Database Model check box to perform a Clear & Reload TS
Model upload or clear the check box to perform a Check for New Service ID
upload.
5 Set the Load Components check box to load services with components (for
Elementary Stream Level scrambling) or clear the check box to load the services
without components (for Service Level scrambling).
6 In the list box, select the Transport Stream(s) for which the TS model must be
uploaded.
Notes:
- You can select a range of devices by holding down the [Shift] key or a number
of devices by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
- On the Load Model from Devices dialog, a Transport stream is indicated
using the following parameters:
Device Name: the device name to which the Transport Stream belongs
3 Type the Transport Stream ID in the TS ID box and the Original Network ID in
the ON ID box.
Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to decimal
and vice versa. For more information, see topic General Settings on page 410.
4 Click on the Add command button.
Note: If you already assigned the service to another Transport Stream before, then the
service ID that was chosen at that time appears in the dialog box.
5 Type the service ID in the Service ID box.
Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to decimal
and vice versa. For info, see topic General Settings on page 410.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm.
- If Reserved or User Private is selected, a value can be selected in the drop down
box beside the Type drop down box.
- If MPEG-1 Audio or MPEG-2 Audio is selected, the language of the audio can
be selected in the Language drop down box.
5 Press the Add command button.
Result: The component is added to the service.
6 Repeat step 2 up to 5 until all components are added to the service.
7 Point to the Close command button to close the dialog.
Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to decimal
and vice versa. For more information, see topic General Settings on page 410.
4 Change the Transport Stream ID in the TS ID box.
5 Change the Original Network ID in the ON ID box.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm.
4 Click on the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort.
4 Click on the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort.
If the Access Criteria Configuration dialog does not appear or is previously closed,
you can also right-click on the Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager
Component user interface and click on the Access Criteria Configuration
command button.
- When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system and the Access
Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the Remove option for the CA system will be disabled.
- When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system but the Access
Criteria is not assigned to any service, the Remove option for the CA system
is enabled. In case of a remove operation the CA system will be removed
together with the corresponding Access Criteria information.
Note: More information about Access Criteria information and assigning Access
Criteria to services or components can be found in topic Access Criteria Information on
page 422 and Assigning Access Criteria on page 422.
Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for the CA system and the
Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the CA system properties are in read-only mode and cannot be changed.
3 Make the necessary changes on the CA System Properties dialog.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm the changes or the Cancel command
button to abort.
Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for the CA system and the
Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the CA system properties are in read-only mode and cannot be changed.
3 Make the necessary changes on the Access Criteria Properties dialog.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm the changes or the Cancel command
button to abort.
Introduction
The Entitlement Control Message identifier (ECM ID) labeling a ECM group in a
Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning message coming from the Event
Information Scheduler (IES) can automatically be generated by the EIS or can be
defined by the user. The following illustration shows a representation of a SCG
provisioning message.
SCG Provisioning
Message
Service ID xxx
.
.
.
SCG ID Components ID xxx
.
.
.
.
Activation Time
1 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
2 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
3 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
4 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM
5 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
Groups
6 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
.
.
y Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM ID
When the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, what means that the ECM IDs must be
defined by the user, an unique ECM identifier must be given during the Access
Criteria assignment. More information concerning the ECM ID Mode can be found in
topic Changing the ECM ID Mode on page 434.
Note: The ECM ID Mode is shown in the lower left corner of the Access Criteria
Configuration dialog.
The Access Criteria assignment has a number of restrictions. The following list
describes the Access Criteria assignment restrictions for automatic ECM ID Mode:
It is not allowed to assign access criteria to a service if access criteria are already
assigned to one or more components belonging to the service.
The following list describes the Access Criteria assignment restrictions for fixed ECM
ID Mode:
The ECM ID must be unique. An ECM ID that is already in use or still pending for
removal can not be used.
It is not allowed to assign access criteria to a service if access criteria are already
assigned to one or more components belonging to the service.
The assignment of multiple Access Criteria to a service or component must be
done in one assignment operation.
Changing the access criteria for a service or component can only be done after
removal of all Access Criteria assignments for that service or component.
The assignment of Access Criteria using the same ECM ID for several services or
components must be done in one assigning operation.
Removing Assignments
The following steps explain how to remove assignments.
1 Select one or more assignments in the Services to Access Criteria list on the
Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager Component user interface.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple assignments in the
Services to Access Criteria list or when you hold the [Shift] key you can make a selection
of multiple consecutive assignments.
2 Click on the Remove command button of the Access Criteria tab.
Result: A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Click on the Yes command button to remove the selected assignment(s) or click
on the No command button to leave without changes.
Result: In case of Yes the selected assignment(s) is (are) removed.
4 Click on the Apply command button to confirm the changes.
Note: When Access Criteria is removed from a service or component that contains
multiple Access Criteria assignments and the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, all Access
Criteria assignments will be removed from this service or component. The service or
component will no longer be scrambled.
Scrambling Control
Introduction
About the Scrambling Control Task
The Scrambling Control Task is a part of Scientific Atlantas Event Information
Scheduler integrated into ROSA NMS and allows configuring the scrambling of
service(s) and/or components (Elementary Streams). Next to this scrambling
configuration the Scrambling Control Task also logs the events during the connection
making process with the DCM device(s) and the events during the scrambling status
alteration of service(s) and/or components. The following picture depicts the
Scrambling Control Task graphical user interface.
The Configuration tab of the Scrambling Control Task represents the Transports
Streams, services, and components (Elementary Streams) as configured in the AC
Manager Component. A Transport Stream is identified by its Original Network
identifier (ON_ID) and Transport Stream Identifier (TS_ID). The program (or service)
within a Transport Stream is identified using its Service Identifier (Service_ID) and
Service Name.
In the TransportStream Services column on the Configuration tab, a Transport
Stream represents all DCM devices of which the ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing
Transport Stream match the indicated IDs.
Communication Setup
During the device-mapping process into ROSA NMS, the communication between
the DCM devices and the computer running the ROSA NMS software is established
using the IIOP protocol. The DCM devices of which the Original Network Identifier
(ON_ID) and the Transport Stream Identifier (TS_ID) of the outgoing Transport
Stream match the identifiers of the Transport Streams configured using the AC
Manager Component, are connected using the TCP protocol followed by a channel
setup.
When errors arisen in the communication between the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task and the DCM device(s) or during rebooting a DCM or the
computer, different communication status messages can be displayed in the
Communication Status column on the Configuration tab of the GUI. The following
table describes these communication status messages.
Communication Description
Message
TransportStream An error is arisen during the device-getting process of a DCM of
Initialization Error which the ON_ID and the TS_ID of the outgoing TS match the IDs of
the TS configured using the AC Manager Component.
The IP settings could not be retrieved for one of the DCM devices.
This error may occur when no EIS interface is configured or the DCM
device is not yet responding on IIOP level.
No scramblers The Scrambling Control Task cant find DCM devices, of which the
ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing TS match the configured TS IDs.
Possible causes:
Communication Description
Message
Communication When the TCP connection is made between the computer running
started the Scrambling Control Task and the DCM the channel setup is
started. This message is displayed during the channel setup process.
Communication The TCP connection between the computer running the Scrambling
stopped Control Task and a DCM device is closed. Possible causes:
Note: The communication states are combined for all DCM devices of which the
outgoing TS IDs match the configured TS IDs. When one DCM fails and the other
DCM devices work fine, a communication status message is given for the device that
fails. More information concerning the failed device can be found in the Log tab of
the GUI.
When the communication between the computer running the Scrambling Control
Task and a DCM fails the computer will check the communication periodically via
ping actions.
When the DCM replies within a certain time the computer supposes that the
communication is restored and starts establishing the TCP connection followed with
a channel set up. If the computer doesnt receives a reply within this time the
computer supposes a failed communication and continues the communication check.
Particular parameters concerning this restoration action can be configured. More
information concerning this configuration can be found in topic Restoring
Communication on page 438.
If a scrambling event must be stopped the computer running the Scrambling Control
Task sends a Scrambling Control Group provisioning message without ECM groups
to the DCM devices scrambling the service(s) or component(s) belongs to. When the
DCM devices reply with a Scrambling Control Group status message the Scrambling
Control Task supposes the service(s) or component(s) are clear and the message
Deprovisioning OK appears in the Communication Status column. When a DCM
replies with a Scrambling Control Group error message, the Deprovisioning Failed
message appears.
Note: The messages logged by the Scrambling Control Task can be found on the Log
page of the task. This Log tab is very useful for troubleshooting purposes when
errors arise during scrambling/clear transitions. For more information concerning
the Log tab, please refer to topic Event logging further in this chapter.
The following table gives an overview of the messages that can be displayed during
starting and stopping scrambling.
Message Description
Provisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
succeeded (clear/scrambling transition request) the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task has received Scrambling Control Group
Status Messages from all DCM devices.
Provisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
failed (clear/scrambling transition request) the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task has received a Scrambling Control Group
Error Message from a DCM.
Deprovisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
succeeded without ECM Groups (scrambling/clear transition request) the
computer running the Scrambling Control Task has received
Scrambling Control Group Status Messages from all DCM devices.
Deprovisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
failed without ECM Groups (scrambling/clear transition request) the
computer running the Scrambling Control Task has received a
Scrambling Control Group Error Message from a DCM.
No scramblers The Scrambling Control Task cant find DCM devices, of which the
ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing TS the service or components belong
to, match the configured TS IDs. Possible causes:
Note: The states are combined for all DCM devices of which the outgoing TS_IDs
match the configured TS_IDs. When one DCM fails and the other DCM devices work
fine, a status message is given for the device that fails. More information concerning
the failed transition can be found in the Log tab of the GUI.
General Settings
Starting the Task
The following steps describe how to start the Scrambling Control Task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
Automatic Start
When the Automatic Start feature of the Scrambling Control Task is enabled, the task
will restart automatically after starting up the computer running the task. The
following procedure explains how to enable or disable the Automatic Start feature of
the task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
2 In the Task Configuration box, set the Automatic Start check box to enable the
feature or clear the check box to disable the feature.
- To select consecutive services, click the first service, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and then click on the last service. To select services that are not
consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click on each service.
- When in a multiple select a collapsed transport stream is selected, all services
of this transport stream are also selected.
2 Select Start Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Result: The DCM devices with outgoing Transport Stream containing the
service/components in question start scrambling.
Note: Scrambling can be done on two different levels, namely Component Level
scrambling and Service Level Scrambling.
Stopping Scrambling
Perform the following steps to stop descrambling a service or the components within
a service.
1 On the Configuration tab of the user interface, right-click on the service(s) of
which scrambling should be ended.
Notes:
- To select consecutive services, click on the first service, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and then click on the last service. To select services that are
not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click on each
service.
- When in a multiple select a collapsed transport stream is selected, all services
of this transport stream are also selected.
2 Select Stop Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Result: The DCM devices with outgoing Transport Stream containing the
service/components in question stops scrambling.
Event logging
The Scrambling Control Task is provided with a powerful event logging system
useful for troubleshooting purposes. The list with logging messages is represented
on the Log tab of the task user interface. The following picture depicts a list with
logging messages.
Each message is accompanied by its generation time and date and the messages are
arranged in chronological order.
Advanced Settings
Restoring Communication
Introduction
For certain purposes it can be necessary to overrule the scrambling control
configuration of the DCM devices with the configuration made by the Scrambling
Control Task. This overruling can be done for a particular Transport Stream, for a
DCM, or for all devices controlled by the Scrambling Control Task.
WARNING:
During an overruling action all scrambled services and elementary stream
become clear for a while.
2 Right-click on the DCM device for which the scrambling control configuration
should be overruled and point to Reset Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.
3 Press the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort the
operation.
WARNING:
During the overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams of
the Transport Streams of the selected DCM device become clear for a while.
In This Chapter
Digital Transport Formatter .............................................................. 442
IP Statmux Controller......................................................................... 446
Scrambling
Each encapsulated Transport Stream can be encrypted by using Basic Interoperable
Scrambling System Fixed Key scrambling (BISS mode 1).
Scrambling encapsulated Transport Stream by using BISS mode 1 is license based,
meaning for each ASI Interface Card for which the encapsulated services must be
scrambled needs one DTF_SCRAMBLING license.
Note: More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page
17.
ASI DTF: the DTF feature for the ASI Interface Card is enabled.
ASI (default): the standard re-multiplexing mode is enabled.
Note: The Type parameter is only applicable when the DCM is provided with
DTF_CONCENTRATOR Licenses.
Result: After changing the Type parameter the following confirmation box is
displayed.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: In the Input Multiplexing table each row represents an input port, which is
indicated by card name (Input Card parameter) and port name (Input Port
parameter).
a In the Status drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Added: The Transport Stream is passed to the outgoing DTF Transport
Stream.
Blocked: The Transport will be blocked.
b Set the Encapsulate check box to pass the Transport Stream packets with DTF
encapsulation or clear this check box to pass the packets without
encapsulation.
c When the Encapsulate check box is set, enter the insertion rate for the
adaptation fields in the AF Insertion Rate (ms) box. A value in the range
from 10 to 500 ms can be entered and is default set to 40 ms.
d When the Encapsulate check box is cleared, tick the Remove Stuffing check
box to remove the stuffing.
e In the Output PID box, enter the PID value for the DTF packets containing the
packets of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.
Note: In DTF mode, the device does not perform PID remapping in case PID
collisions occur between non encapsulated and capsulated streams. Be sure
that no PID collisions can happen.
f Tick the Scramble check box if the content of the corresponding Transport
Stream must be scrambled.
g In the Key box, enter the 12 digit hexadecimal session key used to scramble
the Transport Stream content.
h Perform step 1 up to 9 for all input ports.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
IP Statmux Controller
DCM IP Statmux Concept
Introduction
Overview
The DCM IP Statmux feature allows transforming a GbE Interface Card into an IP
statistical multiplex controller. A GbE interface of such interface card must be
connected to a number of MPEG encoders via Ethernet in order to control their video
rate in one or multiple Statmux pools.
WARNING:
A GbE Interface Card transformed into an IP Statmux controller can no longer
participates into re-multiplex applications.
Encoder #2 IP or ASI
SDI SDI
Encoder #3 IP or ASI
SDI SDI
Modulators
Encoder #4 IP or ASI
Power T
Vu M
SDI SDI
DCM Power T
Vu M
SDI Scie
m1
S
P
S
2
Manager
M
SDI Router Or
Atla
ntific
nta
Power T
Vu M
IP Switch
Power T
Vu M
Power T
Vu M
SDI SDI
IP Switch
I
P
ROSA NMS
ROSA CLIENT
Features
The DCM IP Statmux controller has the following features:
Supports a maximum number of 60 encoders / GbE Interface Card
Connects via Ethernet to the Scientific Atlanta encoder
IP based communication between DCM IP statmux card and MPEG encoders
Support of up to 20 Statmux pools / GbE Interface Card and up to 60 encoders
per pool
Allows a mix of fixed rate and statistically multiplexed channels on the same
multiplex
Supports default target bitrate, minimum and maximum bitrate allocation,
priority and quality limit for each channel
Flexible management of services and pools using the Statmux Pool Manager tool
integrated in ROSA NMS
Interaction with ROSA DHB task and/or ROSA EM for advanced redundancy
support (IP Statmux controller as well as encoder backup)
Statmux pool and service information available on the DCM embedded user
interface
Software Requirements
A DCM participation into an IP Statmux application needs a number of products.
The following table shows the software requirements for these products.
Statmux Pool
A Statmux pool is a group of services that share a limited amount of bandwidth for
statistical multiplexing. The Statmux pool bitrate is the total amount of available
bandwidth. During the statmuxing process each service is continuously allocated a
controlled amount of bandwidth.
At startup, the encoder starts at a default bit rate. As soon as the encoder established
communication with the DCM IP Statmux controller, statmuxing may start. Only
active services contribute to the Statmux pool and participate in the statmuxing
process. When a service is disabled, or for example the IP link with the controller is
down, statmuxing continues for the remaining services of the Statmux pool only.
For each encoder it is possible to specify a minimum, maximum, and default bit rate,
as well as priorities for each service to balance higher priority services with others.
The sum of the default bit rates equals the Statmux pool bit rate.
The following illustration shows how the rate of each service in a Statmux pool may
vary and end up in 100 percent Statmux pool usage.
When the total bit rate of all statmuxed services approaches the Statmux pool bit rate,
the DCM IP Statmux controller prioritizes the services to stay below the Statmux pool
bit rate limit. You may define the priority setting for each encoder.
IP Statmux Configuration
Introduction
Before a DCM can act as IP Statmux Controller, the Statmux Controller function of
one or more GbE Interface Cards must be enabled. Enabling this function involves
removing of all configuration settings of the interface card and the Boundary
parameter is set to 6000. The procedure to enable the Statmux Controller function of
a GbE Interface Card is described in topic Enabling or Disabling the Statmux Controller
Function on page 450. For more information concerning Boundary parameter, please
refer to sub topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 68.
For each individual encoder participating into the Statmux application, the Statmux
parameters as well as the bit rate budget must be configured. To facilitate these
configurations, Scientific Atlanta has developed the Statmux Pool Manager (SPM)
tool, which is integrated into ROSA NMS.
For redundancy purposes the DCM IP Statmux Controller has been developed to
support device backup as well as encoder backup. Both device scenarios can be
controlled by means of ROSA Element Manager or by means of ROSA DHB Task.
More information concerning DCM IP Statmux redundancy can be found in the
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application Note.
Note: DCM with software package version 5.1 do not support Statmux Controller
redundancy controlled via standalone device backup.
Setting Up
Introduction
Before the SPM tool can be used to manage encoders in a statmux application, an
SPM resource must be created and the encoders must be mapped into ROSA NMS.
Once the SPM resource is created and the encoders are mapped, logical relations
must be created between the encoders and the SPM resource.
Note: For each Statmux pool in the statistical multiplex application an SPM resource
must be created.
This topic describes how to create a Statmux Pool Manager resource in ROSA, and
how to setup a map with relations between the encoders and the Statmux Pool
Manager resource. The procedure to install the SPM tool is described in topic
Installing the ROSA 3.0 Drivers on page 579. The procedure to install the encoder
driver, to detect the encoders, and to map the encoders into ROSA can be found in the
ROSA Network Manager System User's Guide or in the documentation shipped with
your encoders.
Note: Creating a relation from the encoder to the SPM or from the SPM to the
encoder makes no difference.
c Click on the Add command button.
Result: The logical relation between the first encoder and the SPM resource is
created.
d Repeat step b and c for all encoders.
Tips:
Inactive encoders (e.g. backup encoders not in use or main encoders in
backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These
inactive encoders are ignored for bit rate budget allocation or setting the Pool
ID and Target IP Address.
The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other
fields are empty.
2 In the Pool Bit Rate box, enter the total available bandwidth for the Statmux pool.
Tip: By setting the pool bit rate as a first step, you will be informed if at any stage the
total of the individual service settings exceeds this bit rate.
3 In the Reserved Bit Rate box, type the bit rate amount that should not be used by
the services and is reserved for e.g. data communication.
Tip: Click on the Leverage Bit Rate command button to view the optimal default
video bit rates according to the stuffing bit rate.
4 In the Bit Rates - Video Default column, change the default video bit rate for
each encoder.
The default rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after
power-up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to in the event of
communication errors between the IP Statmux Controller and the encoder, or when
the IP Statmux Controller is disconnected.
The default rate is also used to set up the Pool Bit Rate budget. The sum of the default
rates for the active Statmux programs equals the size of the Statmux Bit Rate pool.
The total rate of the Statmux programs will not go beyond the Statmux Bit Rate size,
but may go lower depending on the maximum quality limit.
Notes:
When a D9032 encoder doesn't participate into a Statmux application and the
encoder is set to Standalone VBR mode, the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR
parameter shows the maximum Standalone VBR rate. When the encoder is
change from Stand-alone Variable Bit Rate mode to Statistical Multiplexing mode
the value in the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter will show the fixed
bit rate.
When the Video Rate Mode parameter of a D9032 encoder is set to Fixed, the
Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter can be used to set the Fixed Video
Rate parameter.
5 Click on the Leverage Bit Rate command button if the video default rates must be
adjusted so that the Pool Bit Rate is met.
This means that all the Statmux programs will have the same default rate. The default
rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after power-up. Also, it
determines the rate the encoder settles to during communication errors between the
IP Statmux Controller and the encoder, or when the IP Statmux Controller is
disconnected.
6 Click on the Apply command button.
Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no
Transport Stream (TS) rates.
Tips:
Inactive encoders (e.g. backup encoders not in use or main encoders in
backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These
inactive encoders are ignored for bit rate budget allocation or setting the Pool
ID and Target IP Address.
The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other
fields are empty.
Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no
Transport Stream (TS) rates.
2 In the Pool ID box, type the Statmux pool identification number.
3 In the Target IP Address box, type the IP address of the IP Statmux Controller
port.
Both a unicast IP address and a multicast IP address can be used. If the IP Statmux
application involves IP Statmux one to one device backup, a multicast IP address
must be used.
Notes:
Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
When the Pool ID and/or Target IP Address of an encoder are not matching
the Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool Manager, the
field of the mismatched Pool ID and/or Target IP Address is colored red.
The Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool Manager can
be applied to the corresponding encoder(s) by clicking the Apply command
button that becomes applicable when such mismatch occurs.
4 Click on the Statmux parameter of the service that has to participate into the
Statmux application and select ON in the drop-down box.
Note: If you activate more Statmux services than supported by the IP Statmux
Controller, only the programs that are activated first will take part in the statmuxing.
5 In the Min - Video Rate parameter, enter the minimum rate for the service.
The instantaneous rate during Statmux operation will not go below the stated
minimum rate. The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum rate if
so determined by the rate algorithm. The minimum Statmux rate depends on the
complexity of the picture and the picture resolution. Setting the minimum rate to half
the default rate as a start point is recommended.
6 In the Max. - Video Rate parameter, enter the maximum rate for the service.
This setting is used to prevent the rate for an individual program from exceeding a
specified value. The range is from 1.5 Mbit/s to 15 Mbit/s
If you do not need limitation to a specific rate, we recommend that you use a setting
about 2 to 3 times the default rate, or just leave the setting at its maximum (15
Mbit/s).
Example: You may need to use a lower maximum rate setting if you want to
demultiplex the transport stream at a later stage and you have limited bandwidth
available for that program. In this case you cannot permit the bit rate to exceed the
specified level and therefore you need to cap it by using the maximum rate setting.
Note: Stating a maximum rate limit may reduce the probability of reaching the
maximum quality limit.
You should use the maximum quality limit setting and not the maximum rate limit
setting to choose your maximum picture quality limit.
The maximum rate setting does not imply that the IP Statmux Controller will always
try to reach that level, but simply that it will not supersede that rate.
7 If relevant change the Delay.
It may be useful to use the Normal delay setting for a return channel that is for game
shows with viewer interaction.
Notes:
SPM automatically sets the delay of all Statmux services to the same setting as
this is required for Statmux services.
SPM does not support the Low delay mode. If the encoder is in this mode SPM
will change it to the Normal delay mode.
In This Chapter
GbE Port Backup................................................................................. 464
Service Backup .................................................................................... 467
Transport Stream Backup .................................................................. 474
Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager ............................. 485
Standalone Device Backup ................................................................ 492
IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager......... 498
GbE
port
Copy 1 IP(TSs) Service 1
Service 2 TS
Port
Pair
GbE Service 3
port
Copy 2 IP(TSs) Port
Backup
Demux Remux
GbE
port
Copy 1 IP(TSs) Service 1
Service 2 TS
Port
Pair
GbE Service 3
port
Copy 2 IP(TSs) Port
Backup
Demux Remux
Since the GbE Interface Card is provided with four GbE ports, GbE port 2 can be used
to backup GbE port 1 or vise versa (port pair 1 - 2) and GbE port 4 to backup GbE port
3 or vice versa (port pair 3 - 4).
Tip: In the DCM Configuration tree on the Configuration page as well as in the
DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page, an active port is indicated
by a black colored port name and an inactive port by a gray colored port name, see
illustration below.
Active Inactive
port port
The active/inactive state of a GbE port can also be checked in the GbE Name and
Network Settings table on the Interface sub page of a GbE Interface Card.
4 In the Backup Mode drop down box of the port set in question, select the desired
backup mode.
5 In the Revertive drop down box, select the desired revertive mode.
6 In the Revert Delay (s) box, enter the time the GbE link on the backup port must
be down before the main port becomes active again. A delay can be entered
between 0 and 60 seconds.
7 In the Trigger Alarm drop down box, select the desired
backup-transition-trigger-alarm.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Service Backup
Introducing Service Backup
General
Service backup is a feature that protects the content of an outgoing Transport Stream
by replacing failing services by backup services. In the example below, the outgoing
Transport Stream is build up with service 1, 2, and 3 from incoming Transport Stream
A. Service 1, 2, and 3 of incoming Transport Stream B are backup services for service
1, 2, and 3 of incoming Transport Stream A.
Demux Remux
1
e
ic
rv
Se
Transport
Stream A
Service 2
Source 1 Transport
Se
rv Stream
ic
e
3
Transport Service 1
Stream B
Service 2
Source 2 Service 3
Service
Backup
When service 1 of Transport Stream A fails the service backup feature of the DCM
automatically replaces the missing service in the outgoing Transport Stream with
service 1 of Transport Stream B.
Demux Remux
1
e
ic
rv
Se
Transport
Stream A
Service 2
Source 1 Transport
Se
Service 1 rv Stream
Removed ic
e
3
Transport Service 1
Stream B
Service 2
Source 2 Service 3
Service
Backup
Backup Trigger
A service backup transition will be triggered by an input service loss alarm. The
alarms used to active a service loss alarm are configurable. For more information,
please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm on page 524.
Service 1
Transport
Stream A
M
Source 1 Service 2 ai
n
Service 3
Transport
Stream B Merged service
in
Source 2 Transport
d
ge
Stream
er
M
Transport Service 1 BU
Stream C Service 2 BU
Backup Source
Backup Scenarios
The service backup feature of the DCM supports following scenarios:
When a service loss is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switch from main to backup service and switches back to
main service when a manual transition is requested (Revertive mode: disabled).
When a service loss is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switches from main to backup service. When the main
service is back for a particular time (Backup - Main Delay (s) parameter) the
device switches back to the main service (Revertive mode: active).
General Notes
In the DCM Outputs tree a service in backup state (outgoing service or one of the
merged services) is indicated by an exclamation mark.
When the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter is disabled
(default value), a main to backup transition will always be done, even when the
backup source is in Service Loss state. The procedure to change the Don't Switch
to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter can be found in topic Changing the
Backup Switching Parameters on page 473.
The name of the outgoing service is by default the name of the active service.
After a main to backup transition, the outgoing service will get the name of the
backup service. The name of the outgoing service can be locked by changing the
name of the outgoing service in the SDTa. The procedure to change the service
name can be found in topic To Change the Service Name of an Outgoing Service.
When a main to backup transition is executed during a splice event, the splice
event can be interrupted. To deal with this, the components of the main service
participating in the splice event must be forced. For more information, please
refer to chapter Digital Program Insertion on page 339.
a In the Revertive drop down box, select Active to enable the revertive mode or
Disabled to disable this mode.
b In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) that
the service loss alarm must be active on the main service before a
main-to-backup transition will be executed.
c In the Backup - Main Delays (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds)
that the service loss alarm must be inactive on the main service after a
main-to-backup transition before a backup-to-main transition will be
executed.
8 In the Main Service Source and each Merged Service Source table, assign
backup services as described in the following steps:
a Add a table entry by pointing to the Add Row command button below the
table.
Result: A new table entry is displayed.
b In the Card drop down box, select the card receiving the backup service.
c In the Port drop down box, select the port receiving the backup service.
d In the Type drop down box, select the input port type:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for a GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
e In the IP Address box, enter the multicast IP Address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The IP Address parameter is only applicable if the Type parameter is
set to GbE Multicast.
f In the UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the port that enters the
Transport Stream the backup service belongs to.
Note: The UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the backup service enters
the device via an ASI port.
g In the SID box, enter the service identifier of the backup service.
9 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: The Status column shows the actual status of the service backup.
7 Click on the Activate command button in the row of the service that has to
become active.
Note: The Activate command button is only applicable for a service in Not Active
state.
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Demux
Transport
Stream A
Source 1
Transport
Stream B
Source 2 Transport
Stream
Backup
If services are passed from Transport Stream A to the output and Transport Stream A
fails, the services from Transport Stream A will be replaced by identical services from
Transport Stream B. The matching criteria for services are Service Identifier (SID).
Note: The services in Transport Stream A and Transport Stream B should be the
same.
Demux
Transport
Stream A
Source 1
TS Loss
Source 2 Transport
Transport
Stream B Stream
Backup
Backup Trigger
A Transport Stream backup transition will be triggered by a Transport Stream loss
(TS Loss) alarm. The alarms used to activate a TS Loss alarm are configurable. For
more information, please refer to topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm
Triggers on page 520.
Scenarios
The Transport Stream backup feature of the DCM supports following scenarios:
When a TS Loss alarm is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switch from main to backup Transport Stream and switches
back to main Transport Stream when a manual transition is requested (Revertive
mode disabled).
When a TS Loss alarm is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switches from main to backup Transport Stream. When the
TS Loss alarm is cleared the device switches back to the main Transport Stream
(Revertive mode active) after a particular time (Backup - Main Delay (s)
parameter).
General Notes
In the DCM Outputs tree a Transport Stream in backup state is indicated by an
exclamation mark.
Cascading Transport Stream backups is not possible.
When the Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter is disabled
(default value), a main to backup transition will always be done, even when the
backup source is in TS Loss state. The procedure to change the Don't Switch to
Backup Source in TS Loss parameter can be found in topic Changing the Backup
Switching parameters on page 484.
When the DCM switches from main to backup Transport Stream, the outgoing
service components can be kept static by defining component tracking rules. For
more information concerning tracking rules, please refer to topic Passing, Blocking,
and Remapping Service Components on page 200.
If Transport Stream backup is combined with DPI, component tracking rules
should be created to avoid unnecessary aborts of the advertising.
Assigning a Backup Transport Stream using the Backup TS table of the Main Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to assign a backup Transport Stream to a
main Transport Stream using the TS Backup table of this main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream to which a backup
Transport Stream must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.
4 In the Backup TS table, perform the following settings.
a Tick the Enabled check box to switch on Transport Stream backup for the
selected Transport Stream.
b In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Enabled: when the TS Loss alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared
and this Transport Stream is in backup state, a backup-to-main transition
will be triggered after a particular time to go to the main Transport
Stream.
Disabled: The Transport Stream remains in backup state when the TS Loss
alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared.
c In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream should be active before a
main-to-backup transition will be triggered.
d In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
e In the Board drop down box, select the Interface Card that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
f In the Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives the backup
Transport Steam.
g In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
h In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
i In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the backup Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Assigning Backup Transport Streams using the Backup TS Table of the Port
The following procedure describes how to assign a backup Transport Stream to a
main Transport Stream using the TS Backup table of the port containing this
Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Stream to
which a backup Transport Stream must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Backup sub page is displayed.
5 In the Backup TS table, complete the following settings in the row of the
Transport Stream to which a backup Transport Stream must be assigned.
i In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: When particular backup Transport Stream settings for all main Transport
Streams with multicast IP address must be changed to similar values, the Update all
TS function of the web browser user interface can be used. The following procedure
describes how to use this function.
1 In the Update All GbE Multicast Backup TS table, enter the desired value in the
box or select the desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should
be changed for all Transport Streams of the selected ports.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured Transport
Stream entries should be added.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Settings sub page containing the Add Peconfigured TS and
Backup TS tables are displayed.
5 In the Add Preconfigured TS table, complete the following settings:
a In the Main Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream is a
multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream in the IP
Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP box.
c In the Backup Card drop down box, select the interface card that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
d In the Backup Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives the
backup Transport Steam.
e In the Backup Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
f In the Backup IP box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The Backup IP box is only applicable if the Backup Type drop down
box is set to GbE Multicast.
g In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
Note: The UDP box is not applicable if the Backup Type drop down box is set
to ASI.
h In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Enabled: when the TS Loss alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared
and this Transport Stream is in backup state, a backup-to-main transition
will be triggered after a particular time to go to the main Transport
Stream.
Disabled: The Transport Stream remains in backup state when the TS Loss
alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared.
i In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream should be active before a
main-to-backup transition will be triggered.
j In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
6 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button the preconfigured Transport Stream
is added in the Backup TS table.
Performing a Manual backup Transition using the Backup TS Table of the Main Transport Stream
The following steps explain how to perform a manual backup transition using the
Backup TS table of the main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a manual
backup transition must be triggered.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the Backup TS table is displayed.
Tip: The active state of the Transport Stream backup is shown in the State box.
4 Click on the Activate - Backup command button (main device active) or the
Activate - Main command button (main device inactive).
Performing a Manual backup Transition using the Backup TS Table of the Port
The following steps explain how to perform a manual backup transition using the
Backup TS table of the port containing main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the main Transport Stream
for which a manual backup transition must be triggered.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Backup sub page is displayed.
5 In the Backup TS table, press the Backup command button in the corresponding
backup Transport Stream entry to trigger a main-to-backup transition or the
Main command button to trigger a backup-to-main transition.
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
In a normal situation the main DCM (the active device) as well as the backup DCM
(the inactive device) process the program content, the ROSA EM monitors both
devices. Streaming on the GbE port of the main device is activated and on the GbE
port of the backup DCM is stopped.
When the ROSA EM detects a Device Operational Failure alarm on the active DCM or
detects that the active DCM becomes not responding, it will start a backup transition.
During this transition the active device will be set to inactive and the inactive device
to active. Activating a device can enable streaming on a GbE port and can activate IP
aliasing on the device depending on the configuration of these features.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT
PS 2
STOP
Scientific
Atlanta
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
The ROSA EM is also able to start a device backup transition when the
communication between the element manager and the main DCM fails due to for
instance a failing main DCM.
CAUTION:
When the communication between the main DCM and the ROSA EM fails and
the main DCM is OK, a backup transition will be triggered to activate the backup
DCM without making the main DCM inactive, meaning both the main DCM as
well as the backup DCM stream.
Special Cases
Application with main and backup routers
When a DCM has to stream to both the main router as well as to the backup router,
the working mode of the corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring,
meaning the backup port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM 3 COM5 COM 6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT
Main Router
Main DCM (active)
Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
Model D9900
STOP
Alarm
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
AD + EMMs
AD + EMMs
SCTE 30
SCTE 30
EMMG
AD Server
Advertising (AD)
EMMs
SCTE 30 messages
LAN
Steps to Take
Before the device backup application which is monitored by ROSA Element
Manager can be used, a number of actions must be completed.
Note: The outgoing Transport Stream configuration for both the main and backup
DCM must be identical.
When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the main DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set to
Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing GbE
Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When a single client (AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the backup
DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to
the port used to feed the main DCM. The IP alias must be equal to the IP alias of
the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the IP
Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 45 or Configuring the IP Aliasing
Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.
When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the backup DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set
to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing
GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
Enter the following parameter on the Properties tab of the main and backup
DCM:
- Script parameter: devdcm.py
For all other parameters on this tab page, use default values.
Note: The backup application can be tested by changing the Backup State parameter
on the Backup tab page of the main DCM from Inactive to Backup and vice versa.
In a normal situation the main DCM (the active device) as well as the backup DCM
(the inactive device) process the program content and both the main and backup DCM
send heartbeat packets to each other. The active DCM sends active-state heartbeat
packets and the inactive DCM inactive-state heartbeat packets.
When a Device Operational Failure alarm occurs on the active DCM, the active DCM
stops sending active-state heartbeat packets and starts sending inactive-state heartbeat
packets after a particular delay; the device becomes inactive. The backup DCM
receives such inactive-state heartbeat packets from the main DCM and becomes active
immediately. When the active device becomes down, the inactive device no longer
receives active-state heartbeat packets from the active device and becomes active
after a while. Activating a device can enable streaming on a GbE port and can
activate IP aliasing on the device depending on the configuration of these features.
CAUTION:
When the communication between the main and backup DCM fails and the main
DCM is still OK, a backup transition will be triggered to activate the backup
DCM without making the main DCM inactive, meaning both the main DCM as
well as the backup DCM are active.
Steps to Take
On the Main DCM
Actions to be done on the main DCM.
Configure the triggers that have to generate a Device Operational Failure alarm. For
more information, please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure
Alarm on page 524.
Configure the Device Backup Settings for the main DCM. Please refer to topic
Configuring the Device Backup Settings on page 497.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the main DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 39.
When a single client (e.g. AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the
backup DCM via a GbE port or via the management port, IP aliasing feature must
be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to the port used to feed the main
DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the IP Aliasing
Feature for the Management Ports on page 45 or Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for
the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.
When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the main DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set to
Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing GbE
Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the backup DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set
to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing
GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
Special Cases
Application with main and backup routers
When a DCM has to stream to both the main router as well as to the backup router,
the working mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring, meaning
the backup port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.
a In the Device Role drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Standalone (default): for devices that do not participate into a standalone
device backup application
Main: for a device that acts as a Main device in a standalone device backup
application
Backup: for a device that acts as a backup device in a standalone device
backup application
b In the Peer IP Address box, enter the IP address of the peer device. The octets
must be separated by dots.
For a main device: the IP address of the backup device
For a backup device: the IP Address of the main device
c In the Main to Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time the main device is down
or the time the Device Operational Failure alarm is active on the main before a
main to backup transition will be triggered.
d In the Heartbeat UDP Port box, enter the UDP Port number of the peer
device.
Note: This parameter must be equal for both the main device and backup
device.
e In the Heartbeat Network Interface drop down box, select the network
interface used by the Heartbeat protocol.
3 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
PS 1
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM) ROSA NMS
PS 2
Scientific
Atlanta
PS 1
PS 2
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Management
Scientific
Atlanta
SDI Router
Encoder #1
SDI SDI IP
Encoder #2
SDI SDI IP
Encoder #3
Model D9900
IP GbE
Alarm
SDI SDI IP PS 1
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
LAN Scientific
Atlanta
PS 2
Encoder #4
SDI SDI IP
Encoder #Backup
SDI SDI IP
During IP Statmux controlling both the main DCM and backup DCM process the
messages coming from the MPEG encoders participating into the IP Statmux pool;
only the active device replies to the encoders. For MPEG encoder redundancy, both
devices keep updated their blacklist with inactive MPEG encoders. When the ROSA
EM detects a Device Operational Failure alarm on the active DCM, it will start a
backup transition. During this transition the blacklist of the backup (active) device
will be checked and updated if required by the ROSA EM. The main (inactive)
device stops replying to the encoders and the backup (active) device starts replying.
For more information concerning the IP Statmux feature, please refer to topic IP
Statmux Controller on page 446.
Note: The IP switch beside the DCM Statmux devices can also trigger a backup
transition, for more information, please refer to the ROSA Element Manager User's
Guide.
Steps to Take
The following list describes the steps to take for configuring DCM IP Statmux backup
using ROSA EM.
Note: The procedure to setup a DCM IP Statmux application can be found in topic IP
Statmux Controller on page 446. The procedure to setup MPEG encoder backup is
described in the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application
Note.
Actions to be done using the ROSA EM GUI.
1 Add the main, backup DCM IP statmux, and encoders to the ROSA EM device list
and restart the ROSA EM device.
2 Select the alarm(s) that should trigger a backup transition.
3 Configure the backup parameters for the main DCM.
On the Backup tab
Backup Device: name of backup device
Backup Script: budcm_smx.py
Restore Script: redcm_smx.py
4 Configure the backup parameters for the main MPEG encoders.
On the DCM tab
DCM device: <name of MAIN DCM>
DCM Blacklist: Select Remove and click on the Execute command button.
The MPEG encoder will be controlled by the DCM IP Statmux.
5 Configure the backup parameters for the backup MPEG encoders.
On the DCM tab
DCM device: <name of MAIN DCM>
DCM Blacklist: Select Add and click on the Execute command button.
The MPEG encoder will not be controlled by DCM IP Statmux.
In This Chapter
Alarm Overview ................................................................................. 502
Configuring the Alarms ..................................................................... 509
Checking the Alarms .......................................................................... 525
Alarm Overview
Interface Card Related Alarms
ETR 290, 1st Priority Alarms
The following list gives an explanation of the priority 1 errors.
TS Sync Loss: The first byte of a Transport Stream packet header is the
synchronization byte (0x47). In a MPEG-2 decoder, the synchronization byte
serves for synchronization with the packetized Transport Stream. A TS Sync Loss
error arises when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two Transport
Stream packets are not detected.
Sync Byte Error: The first byte of the Transport Stream packet header is the
synchronization byte (0x47). In the MPEG-2 decoder the synchronization byte
serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream. When the
synchronization byte is missing or contains errors too often, a MPEG-2 decoder
will not be able to synchronize to the transport stream. A Sync Byte Error is
generated when the synchronization byte in a TS packet is not detected.
PAT Error: The Program Association Table (PAT) contains a list of all programs
and Packet Identifiers (PIDs) contained in the transport stream and of associated
Program Map Tables (PMTs), which contain detailed program descriptions. If the
PAT is not available within a particular time interval 9 or contains an error, a
MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the TS.
Note: An incoming VBR Transport Stream with low bit rate can trigger a PAT error.
CC Error: Packets with a particular PID value were lost, appeared in an incorrect
order, or appeared more than twice. The PID value appears in the Detail column
of the status overview table.
PMT Error: The PMT (Program Map Table) is a table for detailed program
descriptions referenced in the PAT. As essential information for the MPEG-2
decoder, it contains the PIDs of all packets of the elementary streams as well as
the PIDs of packets serving for the transmission of PCR values associated with the
program. The PMT is of key importance for decoding TV and audio programs. If
the PMT is not available within a particular time interval or contains an error, a
MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the
transport stream.
9The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a
alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be
found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.
PID error: The packet with a particular PID and referred to in the PMT is not
found within the specified time interval 10.
Other Alarms
The following list explains the other Transport Stream related alarms.
Active ECMG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP
connection with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) is removed
while ECMs are still requested via this connection.
Active EIS Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP connection
with the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) is removed.
Active EMMG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP
connection with the Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is
removed while EMMs are still requested via this connection.
Active PSIG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP connection
with the PSI Generator (PSIG) is removed while PSI/SI information is still
requested via this connection.
Async sources: This Statmux related alarm will only be generated in synchronous
mode. It indicates that the Statmux pool encoder messages were received outside
the time window of 16 ms or that 525 and 625 video sources were detected within
the same Statmux pool.
Bandwidth Exceeded: The sum of the services and components within a
Transport Stream has exceeded the bit rate that is assigned to the Transport
Stream.
Channel closed by CA System: The channel between the DCM and the
Conditional Access System (CAS) is closed by the CAS.
Connection with CA System lost: The TCP connection with the Conditional
Access System is interrupted.
Destination IP Unresolved: This alarm is generated when the MAC address for a
unicast IP address of an outgoing Transport Stream can not be resolved.
Encoder dropout: This Statmux related alarm is generated when encoder
messages from an encoder part of a Statmux pool were not received during 1
frame period.
FEC L/D Error: This alarm is generated when a Transport Stream enters the
device with forward error correction (FEC) scheme L x D > 100. For more
information concerning forward error correction, please refer to Forward Error
Correction on page 155.
10The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a
alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be
found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.
Insertion Channel Active: This DPI related alarm is generated when a splicing
event is started.
Link Loss: The GbE link is down between the source device and the DCM or
between the DCM and the destination device.
Missing FEC Stream(s): This alarm is generated if one or both FEC streams are
missing for the incoming Transport Stream.
No Components to Scramble: CP Extension: There are no components available
for scrambling.
No DTF Concentrator License Available: Each ASI Interface Card participating
into a DTF/MTR application consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This alarm
is generated when the card mode of an Interface Card is set to ASI DTF and there
are no more DTF Scrambling Licenses available. More information concerning
Licences can be found in topic Licensing on page 17.
No DTF Scrambling License Available: Each ASI Interface Card participating
into a DTF/MTR application for which the Transport Stream must be scrambled
consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This alarm is generated when the
scrambling feature is switched on and their are no more DTF Scrambling Licenses
available. More information concerning Licences can be found in topic Licensing
on page 17.
No ECMG Connection Available: This alarm is generated when there is no link
with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) or when there is no
channel capacity available.
No ECM's available: CP Extension: this alarm arises when the DCM no longer
receives ECMs for a scrambled service.
No EMM resources available: The maximum number of generated EMM 11
streams that can be passed is 64. This alarm occurs if the number of generated
EMM streams passed to the output exceeds 64.
No FEC License Available (Decoding): This alarm is generated if no license is
available at the arrival of an incoming Transport Stream when the Default Input
FEC Settings Mode is set to 1D FEC or 2D FEC. In this case FEC for the
corresponding Transport Stream will be disabled.
No FEC License Available (Encoding): This alarm is generated when not enough
licenses are available after a reboot if the Default Input FEC Settings Mode is set
to 1D FEC or 2D FEC.
PMT section exceeds 1K: the PMT section is limited to 1 K Byte, this alarm occurs
if the PMT section exceeds this limit.
Port Bandwidth Exceeded: the sum of the bandwidth of all outgoing Transport
Streams on a particular GbE port has exceeded the maximum bandwidth for the
corresponding port.
Received Channel Error Message: The DCM received a channel error message
from the Conditional Access System.
Requested PID could not be allocated: A particular component for scrambling
purposes could no be allocated, e.g. the PID is already in use, another free PID is
automatically allocated.
Scrambling not started: Scrambling is not started because there are no
components or no Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) settings.
SD/HD Mismatch: This alarm is generated when a High Definition (HD) service
of which the SD/HD parameter is set to SD is added to a Transrating Group. The
corresponding HD service will be blocked.
Service in Backup (Service Loss): This alarm is generated when a service is in
backup state triggered by a Service Loss alarm.
Service in Backup (TS Loss): This alarm is generated when a service is in backup
state triggered by a TS Loss alarm.
Service Loss: The alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are configurable. More
information concerning the configuration of Service Loss triggers can be found in
topic Service Backup on page 467.
Service Loss at Output: This alarm is generated for an outgoing service for which
the corresponding incoming service and incoming backup services are in Service
Loss state.
TS Loss: A Transport Stream Loss alarm can be generated when one of the
following alarms is triggered: Service Loss alarm, Sync Loss alarm, Sync Byte Error
alarm, or Stream Loss alarm. For more information concerning the TS Loss alarm,
please refer to sub topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers on page
520.
Too many encoders in pool: This Statmux related alarm is generated when the
Statmux pool has reached the maximum number of encoders allowed in a pool.
Too many encoders total: This Statmux related alarm is generated when the
maximum number of statmuxing encoders has been exceeded.
Transrating problem: This alarm is generated when the DCM is not able to
transrate the service due to poor quality of the incoming service or because of the
incoming service is scrambled.
Trigger backup:
UDP Loss: This alarm is generated if a particular port no longer receives UDP
packets.
UDP Stream Loss: The Transport Stream of which services are passed to the
output is not longer detected at the corresponding UDP Port.
Possible causes:
The corresponding Transport Stream is played out to another UDP port.
The corresponding Transport Stream is not longer present at the input.
The UDP Port to which the Transport Stream is played out is lower than the
GbE UDP Boundary setting.
Unreferenced Pid Error: The Transport Stream is permitted to contain only
packets with program-specific information (PSI and SI tables), packets with
certain PIDs that are reserved in the MPEG-2 standard, and packets that are
identified in a Program Map Table (PMT).
Notes:
- The alarm message reporting for this alarm is default disabled, meaning
ROSA NMS and/or SNMP TRAP receivers will not be informed when such
alarm arises. The procedure to enabling alarm message reporting can be
found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms on
page 510.
- With the exception of Transport Streams with missing PAT, this alarm will
only be generated for components with PID higher than 32.
Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached: The DCM is able to handle 500
incoming unreferenced components per second and per interface card. The alarm
is generated when the number of incoming unreferenced components exceeds
500.
User Selected PCR PID Error: This alarm is generated when the Time Base
Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR and the defined service is missing, has no
PCR PID, or has a PCR PID that doesn't arrive regulary (within 100 ms).
PS 2 Failure: This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS2 is
failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the Digital
Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 System Guide shipped with the device.
Keep in mind that only authorized and trained service personnel are allowed to
maintain and to service the DCM after reading the Important Safety Instructions
in the system guide.
NTP Clock Offset: This alarm is generated when the time difference between
DCM and the NTP server exceeds 15 ms after a time synchronization action. This
alarm will only be generated if splicing licenses are in use.
Operational Temperature: This alarm is generated when the device temperature
exceeds 65 C (149 F).
Test Message: A test message is generated. More information concerning test
messages can be found in sub topic Generating Test Messages on page 510.
For more information about changing the severity level of an alarm, please refer to
sub topic Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms on page 511 or sub topic
Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 512 further in this topic.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: The presence and status of both power supply units are represented using
LEDs on the front panel of the DCM. When a PSU slot is empty, the corresponding
LED illuminates red. By disabling the corresponding alarm, this LED can be
extinguished.
Note: For some reasons it can be useful to change the severity level of a test message.
The procedure to change the severity level can be found in topic Configuring the
Settings of the Device Alarms on page 511 or topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface
Alarms on page 512.
3 In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the severity.
4 In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before
an alarm message is generated.
5 In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before
the corresponding alarm message is cleared.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
4 In the Generate Alarms drop down box, select For All Services to generate a
service alarm / TS Loss alarm for all services / Transport Streams missing at the
input or select Only for Groomed Services for services / Transport Streams only
passed to the output.
5 In the Global Alarm Settings table, enable or disable the alarm message
reporting by selecting Yes or No in the Enabled drop down box of the alarm in
question.
6 In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the desired severity.
7 In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before
an alarm message is generated.
8 In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before
the corresponding alarm message is cleared.
9 In the Error Intervals (ms) table, change the following error intervals if required:
PAT Error parameter: the time that the PAT is allowed to be not present in the
Transport Stream before a PAT error will be generated
PMT Error parameter: the time that the PMT is allowed to be not present in
the Transport Stream before a PMT error will be generated
PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter: the time that a particular audio or video
component is allowed to be not present in the Transport Stream before a PID
error will be generated.
PID Error (Data) parameter: the time that a particular data component is
allowed to be not present in the Transport Stream before a PID error will be
generated.
10 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
- For video services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the video
component or an audio component is missing, not for missing data
components.
- For audio services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when an audio
component is missing, not for missing data components.
- For data services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when a data
component is missing.
Scrambled Service: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the incoming
service is scrambled.
The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. E.g. if a UDP Stream Loss is detected,
Missing in PAT, PMT Error, an PID Error will not be triggered. This means that a
Service Loss alarm will not be triggered when a TS Sync Loss is detected and TS Sync
Loss is not defined as Service Loss alarm trigger even if other alarms are defined to
trigger a service loss alarm. The following table shows this alarm hierarchy.
Hierarchy Alarm
1 TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card)
UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card)
2 Missing in PAT
3 PMT Error
4 Scrambled Service
5 PID Error
Tip: When most of the incoming services must be defined with the same Service Loss
trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each
new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss - Mode
is set to Default will be configured with these settings. The default parameters are
dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all incoming services
for which the Service Loss mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The
procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in sub topic Changing
the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 519.
Notes:
Depending on the setting of the Generate Alarms parameter, alarms can be
generated for all incoming services and components or only for services and
components which are passed to the output. For more information concerning
the Generate Alarms parameter, please refer to topic Configuring the Settings of
the Interface Alarms on page 512.
For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding service loss alarm triggers
(called preconfigured triggers) for services not (yet) present at the input of the
device. To procedure to add preconfigured trigger can be found in sub topic
Adding Preconfigured Triggers on page 517.
In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the
corresponding Interface Card will be used to trigger a Service Loss alarm.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.
When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card
only), UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only) Missing in PAT, PMT Error,
Scrambled Service, and/or PID Error.
When PID Error is set as trigger, select one of the following settings in the
PID Type drop down box:
Any: a trigger will be given when one of the components within the
incoming service is missing.
List: a trigger will be given when one of the components as specified in the
PID list box is missing.
Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the type of missing
component.
When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the
components(s) for which a trigger must be given when missing. Multiple
PIDs must be separated by commas.
6 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Tips:
Each preconfigured trigger entry in the Service Settings table for which the
service is not yet present at the input is suffixed by a check box, this check box can
be used to delete the entry.
The service loss parameters for both the services present at the input and the
services not yet present can be changed in the Service Settings table. The
procedure is similar to the procedure described in sub topic To Configure Triggers
for Services Present at the Input on page 515.
Tips:
To set check boxes of consecutive rows on the Service Settings table, tick the
check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
The rows in the Service Settings table can be sorted by a specific parameter
by pointing to the column header of this parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by clicking the header.
5 Click on the Remove Checked Items command button to remove the selected
rows or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Triggers for which the service is present at the input can not be removed or set
to default.
The following procedure explains how to change the default service loss trigger
alarms.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default service loss trigger alarms should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Point to the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS-Service Backup tab.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed containing the Default Service
Backup Settings table.
5 In the Default Service Backup Settings table, perform the following steps to
configure the default service loss trigger alarms:
a In the Service Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Service
Loss trigger mode:
Disabled: service loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.
b When the Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the
Service Loss Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a
Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), UDP Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error, Scrambled Service,
and/or PID Error.
c When the PID Error check box is ticked, select one of the following settings in
the corresponding drop down box: Any or Smart.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Hierarchy Alarm
1 Service Loss
2 Stream Loss
3 Sync Loss
4 Sync Byte Error
Tips:
When most of the incoming Transport Streams must be defined with the same
Transport Stream loss alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using
default settings. Each new incoming Transport Stream and each incoming
Transport Stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be
configured with these settings. The default parameters are dynamic, meaning
when these default parameters are changed, all incoming Transport Stream for
which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The
procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in sub topic
Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms on page 522.
For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding TS loss alarm triggers
(called preconfigured triggers) for Transport Streams not (yet) present at the
input of the device. To procedure to add preconfigured trigger can be found in
sub topic Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers on page 520.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Loss link.
Result: The Service - TS Loss sub page is displayed containing the TS Loss table.
The following procedure explains how to change the default Transport Stream loss
trigger alarms.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default Transport Stream loss trigger alarms should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
a In the TS Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Transport
Stream loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Transport Stream loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream loss alarm are selectable.
b When the TS Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the TS Loss
Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a Transport
Stream loss alarm: Service Loss, Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Sync
Loss (ASI Interface Card only), and/or Sync Byte Error (ASI Interface Card
only).
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
3 Set the check box of the card to trigger a Device Operational Failure alarm when a
Card Not Operational alarm on the corresponding card arises or clear the check box
to disable the trigger.
Result: Disabling all triggers for all cards can be done by selecting Disable in the
Mode drop down box.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
When a Service Loss or TS Loss alarm arises, the icon of the branch responsible
for the alarm is adapted in the tree on the Service page. The status indication of a
critical or major alarm is propagated to the interface card branch. The following
picture shows the status propagation of a service loss alarm.
Tip: To sort the Input TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the header.
The following information can be found on the Input TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card that enters the Transport Stream in question
Port: the name of the input port that enters the Transport Stream in question
IP Address: the multicast IP Address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream in question.
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, which enters the
incoming Transport Stream in question.
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the incoming Transport Stream in
question
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the incoming Transport Stream in
question
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the Transport Stream in question
Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview
Tips:
Tip: To sort the Input Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click
on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the header.
In the Input Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the
following information:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the service in question belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the incoming Transport Stream to which
the service in question belongs
SID: the Service Identifier of the corresponding incoming service
Name: the name of corresponding incoming service
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding incoming
service
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm
details of the corresponding incoming service
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview
table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active
Detail: alarm details
Note: IP address 0.0.0.0 in the detail of an alarm generated on a GBE port indicates
that the alarm is generated on a Transport Stream with the same IP address as the IP
address of the port.
Tip: To sort the Output TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the header.
The following information can be found on the Output TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card streaming the Transport Stream in question
Port: the name of the input port streaming the Transport Stream in question
IP Address: the destination multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream in
question
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream in
question
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the Transport Stream in question
Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click
on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
SID: the Service Identifier of the failing service (if applicable)
Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)
PID: the Packet Identifier of the failing component (if applicable)
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active
Tip: To sort the Output Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing repeatedly to the header.
In the Output Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the
following information:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card streaming the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
Port: the name of the input port streaming the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
IP Address: the destination multicast IP Address of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
which the service in question belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to which
the service in question belongs
SID: the Service Identifier of the corresponding outgoing service
Name: the name of corresponding outgoing service
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding outgoing
service
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm
details of the corresponding outgoing service
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview
table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active
Detail: alarm details
Each row in the Device Status Overview table is provided with the following
information:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page
509.
Card: the card name of the interface card on which an alarm arises
Port: the name of the port on which an alarm arises
Measurement: the alarm name
Detail: the alarm details (if applicable)
In This Chapter
Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree......... 538
Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables......................................... 541
Notes:
In contrast with the input bit rate figures, which include the stuffing rate, the
output bit rate figures do not include stuffing bit rates.
The bit rate figures shown in the trees are not automatically updated. These
figures will be updated by pressing the Reload command button.
After loading the tables from the DCM, the bit rate figures are refreshed at regular
time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some
reasons it can be useful to switch off these automatically refresh actions. Therefore
this popup window is provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh actions.
Tips:
The identification parameters of the Transport Stream are shown above the table.
For more information concerning the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and
PSI/SI/PSIP Overview table, please refer to topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview
Tables on page 541.
After loading a table from the DCM, the bit rate figures are refreshed at regular time,
meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some
reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatically refresh actions. Therefore
each bit rate sub page is provided with a Refresh drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh actions.
Each row in the table represents an incoming service containing the following
information:
Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream to which
the service belongs
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (if applicable)
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the Transport Stream
to which the service belongs (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream the service
belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream the service
belongs to
SID: the Service Identifier of the service
Name: the name of the service
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Incoming Service
The bit rates overview of the components within an incoming service can be found in
the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an
example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong are
shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the component
Name: the name of the component
ES Type: the component type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the component
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the component since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the component since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the component since reset
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the components of the
incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the service for which component bit rates must be checked, point to
the arrow in the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is
displayed
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
The following steps explain how to check the bit rates overview of the incoming
Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Incoming Transport Stream
A bit rates overview of all services within a particular incoming Transport Stream can
be found in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture shows
an example of a Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the services
belong are shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
SID: the service identifier (SID) of the incoming service
Name: the name of the incoming service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information
concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the
Components within an Incoming Services on page 543.
The following procedure explains how check the bit rates overview of the services
within a particular incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the incoming Transport Stream for which the service bit rates must
be checked, point to the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table of the Transport Stream in
question is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the services within a particular incoming Transport Stream can
be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the DCM
Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within a Transport Stream
The bit rates of the components within a Transport Stream are categorized in the
Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts
such table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the components
belong are shown above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the table
Type: the table type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the table
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the table since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the table since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the table since reset
The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates of the components
within a Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the Transport Stream for which component bit rates must be
checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column.
4 Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table of the selected
Transport Stream is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the components within a particular incoming Transport Stream
can be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Outputs sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.
Perform the following steps to check the bit rate overview of outgoing Transport
Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Outgoing Transport Stream
The bit rates of the services within a particular outgoing Transport Stream are
categorized in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
depicts such table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the services
belong are displayed above the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
SID: the service identifier of the outgoing service
Name: the name of the outgoing service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the outgoing service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates of the services within a particular
outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the detail column, point to the arrow of the Transport Stream for which the
service bit rates must be checked.
Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the services within a particular outgoing Transport Stream can
be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the DCM
Outputs tree on the Service page and pointing to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Service
The bit rates overview of the components within an outgoing service can be found in
the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an
example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong are
shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the component
Name: the name of the component
ES Type: the component type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the component
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the component since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the component since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the component since reset
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the service for which component bit rates must be checked, point to
the arrow in the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is
displayed
Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Transport Stream
The bit rates of the components within an outgoing Transport Stream are categorized
in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
depicts such table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the tables belong
are displayed above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row in the table represents a table containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the table
Type: the table type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the table
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the table since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the table since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the table since reset
Perform the following steps to check the bit rates of the components within a
particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the detail column, point to the arrow of the Transport Stream for which the
component bit rates must be checked.
Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
Each row in this table represents an outgoing service containing the following
information:
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream the service
belongs to
Port: the port name used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing Transport
Stream the service belongs to (if applicable)
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing
Transport Stream the service belongs to (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
which the service belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream the
service belongs to
SID: the Service Identifier of the outgoing service
Name: the name of the outgoing service
The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates overview of the outgoing
services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after clicking on the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Perform the following steps to check the services that belong to Transrating Groups.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Transrating Group.
Result: The Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Transrating Group
The bit rates of the services within a Transrating Group are categorized in the
Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table. The following table shows a
Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: The identification parameters of the Transrating Group, to which the services in
the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table belong, are shown above
the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing Transport
Stream to which the service belongs
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing
Transport Stream to which the service belongs
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
SID: the Service Identifier of the service
Name: the name of the service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information
concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the
Outgoing Services on page 553.
The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates of the services within a
Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Transrating Group.
Result: The Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the Transrating Group for which service bit rates must be checked,
point to the arrow in the Detail column.
4 Result: The Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table of the selected
Transrating Group is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table by a
particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
In This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................................... 560
Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package ................................... 561
Upgrading the DCM Software.......................................................... 565
Introduction
About the Upgrade Software
To facilitate the software upgrade of a DCM, Scientific Atlanta has developed the
Upgrade-It software package. The Upgrade-It software package runs as a
stand-alone application on a remote PC, which is connected to the same LAN as the
10/100Base-T or GbE port of the DCM.
System Requirements
To install the Upgrade-It software package and to run the application, the PC should
meet the following minimum requirements.
Pentium processor, minimum 166 MHz.
128Mb of RAM
SVGA Graphics Adapter with minimum 800x600 resolution
Windows compatible mouse
Operating system
Windows 98 or Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
2 Click on the Next command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the installation.
Result: The Choose Destination Location page of the InstallShield Wizard is
displayed.
5 Choose a program folder or enter a new one and click on the Next command
button.
Result: After a while the dialog shows that the installation is completed.
Note: When the Upgrade-It software is already installed, restarting the installation
procedure will result in a dialog with other options. The options allow you to
modify, repair or remove the installation. If you want to upgrade with a new
software version, choose the Repair option.
Notes:
The Upgrade-It tool is provided with a Reboot after Upgrade function that gives
an additional and unnecessary reboot command to the DCM after the
upgrading-process when enabled.
WARNING:
For DCM devices with software package lower than version 2.5, this additional
reboot action will clear all configuration settings stored on the device. Make
sure this Reboot after Upgrade function is disabled.
Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu and unchecking
the Reboot after Upgrade menu item.
The Upgrade-It tool is provided with an option that removes installation files
after flashing. When this option is enabled during a DCM upgrade a number of
error messages will be displayed. These errors have no effect on the upgrading
process. Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu
and unchecking the Delete Files after Flashing menu item.
4 In the Available Modules box, check the software module that must be used to
upgrade the DCM.
Note: The Type parameter in the Targets box originates from the target.
6 In the Targets box, check the device that should be upgraded.
7 Click the Refresh command button to refresh the Slot Details of the selected
targets.
8 Select the file to be upgraded by selecting the check box manually in the Slot
Details list or by pressing the Select command button.
Notes:
After upgrading the software the device will automatically reboot, which takes
several minutes.
Clicking on the Refresh command button will refresh the Slot Details box.
Customer Information
Introduction
This chapter contains information on obtaining product support.
In This Appendix
Product Support.................................................................................. 572
Return Products for Repair................................................................ 574
Product Support
Obtaining Support
IF... Then...
you have general questions about this contact your distributor or sales agent for
product product information or refer to product data
sheets on www.scientificatlanta.com.
you have technical questions about this call the nearest Technical Support center or
product Scientific Atlanta office.
you have customer service questions or call the nearest Customer Service center or
need a return material authorization Scientific Atlanta office.
(RMA) number
Customer service must receive a purchase order number within 15 days after
you receive the proforma invoice.
Products can accrue costs through damage or misuse, or if no problem is
found. Products incurring costs will not be returned to you without a valid
purchase order number.
Proceed to Packing and Shipping the Product.
In This Appendix
Introduction ......................................................................................... 578
Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers.................................................... 579
Making Task Instances....................................................................... 584
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS ................................................... 586
Working with the Graphical User Interfaces .................................. 589
Using DCM Scripts ............................................................................. 593
Introduction
About ROSA NMS
ROSA, Scientific Atlanta's Network Management System (NMS), is a complete
solution to manage the Scientific Atlanta equipment in the most efficient,
cost-effective manner possible. The ROSA platform supports a wide range of
broadcast and broadband networks with a complete set of protocol and device
drivers, automation tasks, and service description models. This network
management system also contains a complete toolbox to integrate third-party
equipment.
The ROSA NMS allows creating customized views like geographical views, rack
layout views, equipment interconnection views to make the diagnostic process
easier.
The ROSA NMS automation tasks help the user to build self-healing systems by
using a wide palette of tasks for backup equipment, transmission links or services.
The ROSA NMS Notification task can send pager, SMS and E-mail messages to
service technicians when certain alarm conditions occur. This task is highly
configurable, different rules and schedules can be defined for each scenario and
service technician.
Macro Component
The Macro Component can be used to execute the DCM macros. More
information can be found in topic Using DCM Scripts on page 593 .
Notes:
When the ROSA system is used for management or configuration purposes, both
the IIOP Protocol Driver and DCM Device driver are required.
When the ROSA NMS system and DCM(s) participate into CA systems, with the
exception of the Macro Component driver all drivers mentioned above must be
installed. The AC Manager Component driver and the Scrambling Control Task
Driver should not be installed when the Event Information Scheduler (EIS)
functionality is performed by a third party device.
Pay attention to the following remarks before installing the drivers into the ROSA
software:
You cannot install drivers with a lower product version.
To upgrade a driver, simply install the newer driver. The old driver will be
replaced automatically. Do NOT uninstall the old driver first!
Downgrading drivers within the same product version is not possible unless you
uninstall the drivers first. Uninstalling a driver results in the loss of all
configurations because all resources using the driver are removed from the
Server Explorer tree.
If you install drivers that require a server software version higher than the current
installed version, the server software will be upgraded automatically.
For detailed information concerning the installation of drivers, please refer to the
Users Guide of the ROSA software.
4 Browse to the folder containing the driver files. These driver files can be found on
the ROSA Installation CD-Rom or on the following location:
ROSA Device Configuration Shell: in the folder \ Program Files \
Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSADevConfShell \ Copernicus \ Drivers\ on the hard
disk of the PC running the ROSA software.
ROSA Single User: in the folder \ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \
ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \ Drivers \ on the hard disk of the PC running
the ROSA software.
ROSA Client: on the servers hard disk in the shared folder \ Copernicus \
Drivers
Notes:
If the \ Drivers folder on the servers hard disk is no longer shared, you can
download all driver files to the hard disk of your client computer. On the
Installed Drivers dialog, click on the Get Drivers from Server command
button.
The files are then copied into the folder \ ROSA3 \ Copernicus \ drivers on
your local hard disk.
When the drivers are downloaded from Scientific Atlanta's FTP server,
browse to the location where you stored these files.
5 Select the driver files required for your application. The following table lists the
driver files.
3 Select Scrambling Control Task and click on the Make Task command button.
Result: The Make Task dialog is displayed.
5 Click on the Close command button to close the Installed Drivers dialog.
3 In Identify device by drop down box, select how to identify the device.
4 If IP address is selected, then type the IP address in the From box. If IP address
range is selected, then type the IP address range values in the From and To box.
5 In the Time Out box, type a timeout value between 10 and 60000 ms.
6 In the Retry Count box, type a retry value between 1 and 5.
7 Click on the OK command button to confirm and to close the dialog.
8 Point to the Apply command button.
9 Select the Map Resources tab on the user interface of the IIOP Protocol driver.
Result: The Map Resources tab is displayed.
10 Select the DCM that must be mapped and click on the New Resource... command
button.
Result: The New Resource dialog is displayed.
11 Enter a resource name in the Name box and press the OK command button to
confirm.
Result: The new DCM will be added to the Server Explorer tree.
Result: The web browser user interface of the selected DCM resource will be opened.
Note: The User Interface can also be opened by on the unit in a map. The following
picture depicts a DCM.
- In the Installed Drivers dialog, select the line of the driver and click on the
Details command button.
- If the \Drivers folder on the servers hard disk is no longer shared, you can
download all driver files to the hard disk of your client computer. On the
Installed Drivers dialog, click the Get Drivers from Server command button.
The files are then copied into the folder \ ROSA3 \ Copernicus \ drivers on
your local hard disk.
- When the macros are downloaded from Scientific Atlanta's FTP server,
browse to the location where you stored these files.
2 Copy the files with .bnm extension (DCM.ApplyComponentRules.Bnm,
DCM.ImportSIData.Bnm, DCM.RemoveRules.Bnm, and DCM.SwitchStreaming.Bnm)
to the following location:
\ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \
MacrosAndScripting
3 Copy the DCM.py file to the following location:
\ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \
MacrosAndScripting \ Scripts
4 Stop and reconnect to the server as described in the ROSA Network Management
System User's Guide.
Result: The DCM Macros are added to the list of the Macro Component.
Header
Tracking
Rules
The header of the DCM_Config file is mandatory and has the following syntax:
Version,1
A row in the Tracking Rule part consist of a number of parameters each separated by a
comma. These parameters are:
4,1, 225.0.0.1 ,49410 ,stream type , ,Audio ,0 x81 , en4 , , ,2 ,86 , pass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14
11
1 Input - Card parameter
2 Input - Port parameter
3 Input - IP Address parameter
4 Input - UDP parameter
5 Tracking type parameter
Valid values: ES PID, PCR, ECM PID, ES ECM PID, Stream Type, and Component Tag
6 Tag parameter
7 Streamtype parameter
Valid values: Video, Audio, DVB Subtitles, DVB Teletext, Data, and User Defined
8 Streamtype Value parameter
9 Language parameter
10 Input PID parameter
11 ES Output parameter
12 Output SID parameter
13 Output PID parameter
14 Status New parameter
Valid values: pass, and block
Note: The Tracking type, Streamtype, and Status New parameter are case
insensitive.
With the exception of the Transport Stream specification parameters (first 4 columns),
the layout of the DCM_Config file is similar to the Component Tracking Rules table
on the Components sub page of the web browser user interface of the DCM. For
more information about these parameters, please refer to topic Tracking Rules on page
206.
Note: For an outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI Interface Card, both the Input - IP
Address parameter and the Input - UDP parameter should be left empty.
The parameters that must be entered to define a tracking rule depend on the tracking
rule type. The table below shows the parameters that must be entered for the
different rule types.
pe
V eam e
D ut
p
D
pu e
ue y
ty
In uag
ES PI
p
al t
ut
am
us
t
ng
O
pe
re
at
g
La
Ty
Ta
SI
PI
St
St
St
ES PID
ES ECM PID
ECM PID
PCR
Streamtype (*)
Comp. Tag
(*) only if streamtype is Audio (may also be left empty)
Since Microsoft Excel is able to import and to create comma-delimited text files, a
service routing file can be created and/or adapted using this spreadsheet application.
Once the service routing file is ready, this file should be saved as a comma-delimited
file (CSV extension). The following illustrations show a DCM_Config opened with
Microsoft Excel.
3 In the Value drop down box, select the DCM to which this macro must be
applied.
4 Press the OK command button to confirm.
5 In the Parameters list box, select the strConfigFile parameter and point to the
Edit... command button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the strConfigFile parameter is displayed.
6 In the Value box, enter the path and file name of the configuration file.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm.
8 Point to the Finish command button.
Note: This procedure describes how to execute the DCM.ApplyComponentRules Macro
manually. Macros can also be executed automatically by using Macro Presets and
Macro Schedules. For more information please refer the Macro Component User's
Guide.
Importing SI Data
Introduction
Program Specific Information (PSI) and Service Information (SI) exported from the
device or created by means of ROSA's SI Editor can be uploaded to the DCM using
the Macro Component.
Note: The PSI/SI is uploaded via the PSIG To MUX interface, therefore a Scientific
Atlanta specific PSIG proxy (: SA Specific) must be configured for the DCM using the
SCS Configurator. More information can be found in topic PSI/SI Generators on page
407.
To execute the DCM.ImportSIData macro, the Macro Component needs the following
knowledge:
The DCM to which SI data must be loaded
The Interface Card and port containing the outgoing Transport Stream for which
SI data must be loaded
The ON ID and TS ID of the Transport Stream
When the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP
address and UDP port
The path and the name of the file containing the SI data
Extended Operations
Introduction
This appendix describes how to download MIBs and traces from the
DCM.
In This Appendix
Downloading MIBs from the DCM.................................................. 608
Viewing Trace Logs ............................................................................ 610
Capturing Live Network Data .......................................................... 615
2 Enter Guest in both the User name drop down box and Password box and press
the Log On command button.
Result: The directory containing the MIB files is shown.
Note: For certain reasons it can be useful to filter the trace logs. The trace logs of the
Main Board (Mainboard Trace) and the trace logs of the interface cards (Board 1 - 4
Trace) can be filtered by assigning particular filter values. The ORB Trace logs can be
filtered by changing the ORB Trace Level. The ORB Trace Level value as well as the
filter values will be passed by your Scientific Atlanta representative.
Note: When the Trace Level parameter is set to All, Minor, or Major, a warning
icon is added in the header of the web browser user interface indicating the
DCM is in service mode.
b In the Modules box of the Main Card, tick or clear the desired module check
box(es).
Note: All module check boxes can be set or cleared by pointing to the
corresponding Enabled All or Disabled All command button.
c Repeat step a and b for all interface cards.
3 Point to the Apply command button.
2 In the Trace Logs table, right-click on the desired trace link and point to Save
Target As... in the short-cut menu.
2 In the Trace Export table, tick the Include Core Files check box if the Core files of
the DCM must be included.
Result: After ticking the Include Core Files check box, the following message box
appears.
4 For a GbE Interface Card, complete the following settings to specify the network
details:
a Enter the name of the port in the TS GbE Port box.
b Enter the destination IP address in the TS IP Address box.
c Enter the UDP port number in the TS UDP Port box.
5 Click on the Start command button.
Result: The capturing process is started.
Note: The network data capturing process is a circular process, meaning when the
last file is filled up with data, the process starts overwriting the first file with new
recorded data.
6 Once the event for which network data information should be recorded arose the
Stop command button must be pressed.
Result: The following message box is displayed.
Additional Configuration
Introduction
This appendix outlines the following additional configurations:
Configuring IP Security on a computer running Windows XP,
Windows 2003 server, or Windows Vista.
In This Appendix
Configuring IPsec on Windows........................................................ 618
Launching MMC
The following steps explain how to open the MMC main screen.
1 From the Windows desktop, click on the Start button in the System Tray, and
then choose Run from the Start menu.
Result: The Run dialog box appears.
2 Enter mmc in the Open drop down box, and then click on the OK command
button.
Result: The MMC main screen appears as shown below.
4 Confirm that the Local computer selection button is selected, and then click on
the Finish command button.
5 Click on the Close command button to close the Add Standalone Snap-in dialog
and to return to the Add/Remove Snap-in dialog.
6 Confirm that IP Security Policies on Local Computer now appears in the Standalone
tab of this dialog.
7 Click on the OK command button to return to the management console.
Result: The screen should now appear as shown below.
Note: If Console Root is highlighted in the left pane, click on IP Security Policies on
Local Computer to display the options shown in the right pane above.
Tip: The IP Security Policies on Local Computer settings can also be accessed via
Control Panel / Administrative Tools / Local Security Policy.
2 Click on the Add command button to open the IP Filter List dialog.
Result: The IP Filter List dialog is displayed. Note that the default name New IP
Filter List appears in the Name box.
3 In the Name box, replace the default name with a new list name that is
meaningful to you (Headend IPs in the example below).
4 Confirm that the Use Add Wizard check box is checked, and then click on the
Add command button to start the IP Filter List wizard.
5 Complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a IP Filter Description and Mirrored property (Windows 2003 Server only):
This specifies a filter in each direction. Tick the Mirrored. Match packets with
the exact opposite source and destination addresses check box.
b IP Traffic Source. This identifies the source of IP traffic for this list. Choose
My IP Address from the drop down box, and then click on the Next
command box.
c IP Traffic Destination. This identifies the destination of the IP traffic for this
list. Choose A specific IP Address from the drop down box, then enter the IP
address of the destination device, and then click on the Next command
button.
d IP Protocol Type. This identifies what protocols are valid for this list. Choose
Any from the drop down box, and then click on the Next command button.
e Click on the Finish command button.
For a computer running Windows 2003 Server, the IP Filter Properties dialog
is displayed.
6 Click on the OK command button to return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter
actions dialog.
7 Confirm that the new IP list now appears in the IP Filter Lists box.
2 Click on the Add command button to start the Filter Action wizard.
3 At the wizard welcome screen, click on the Next > command button.
4 Complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a Filter Action Name. Replace the default name New Filter Action with a
meaningful name for the new action (e.g., Headend IPsec Filter), and then click
on the Next > command button.
b Filter Action General Options. Select the Negotiate Security selection
button, and then click on the Next > command button.
c Communicating with computers that do not support IPsec. Choose Do not
communicate with computers that do not support IPsec, and then click on
the Next > command button.
d IP Traffic Security. Select the Custom selection button, and then click on the
Settings command button.
e Tick the Data integrity and encryption (ESP) check box and then select MD5
and 3DES from the Integrity algorithm and Encryption algorithm drop
down boxes, respectively.
f Click on the OK command button to save your selections and return to the
Filter Action wizard IP Traffic Security wizard page.
g Click on the Next command button to proceed to the final page of the Filter
Action wizard.
h Click on the Finish command button.
Result: The new filter action should now appear in the Filter Actions box as
shown below.
5 Double-click on the filter action you just created to open the Headend IPsec Filter
Properties dialog.
6 On the Security Methods tab, confirm that the Session key perfect forward
secrecy check box is checked and the other boxes are cleared, as shown in the
picture below.
7 When finished, click on the OK command button to close the Headend IPsec
filter Properties dialog and return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter actions
dialog.
8 Click on the Close command button to close this dialog and return to the MMC
dialog.
2 At the wizard welcome screen, click on the Next > command button to continue,
and then complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a IP Security Policy Name. In the Name box, replace the default policy name
with a name that is more meaningful to you (e.g., Headend Policy), and then
click on the Next > command button.
b Requests for Secure Communication. Confirm that the Activate the default
response rule check box is not checked, and then click on the Next >
command button.
c On the final page of the wizard, confirm that the Edit Properties check box is
checked, and then click on the Finish command button.
3 Select the General tab and click on the Advanced command button.
Result: The Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.
5 In the Security method preference order list box, select a security method with
3DES encryption and move it to the top of the list by clicking on the Move up
button.
Note: When the desired method is not available, an existing method can be modified
by clicking on the Edit... button or a new method can be created by clicking on the
Add... button.
9 On the IP Filter List tab, select the Headend IPs selection button.
10 On the Filter Action tab, select the Headend IPSec Filter selection button.
11 On the Authentication Methods tab, click on the Add command button.
Result: The New Authentication Method Properties dialog appears as shown below.
12 Select the Use this string (preshared key) selection button, and then enter
alphanumeric string (between 1 and 200 characters).
Note: Be sure to make a note of this string, as it must exactly match the preshared key
entered in the destination device.
13 Click on the OK command button to save the preshared key entry and return to
the New Rule Properties dialog.
Result: The preshared key is added to the Authentication method preference order
box.
14 Select the existing Kerberos entry, and then click on the Remove command button
to delete this entry from the list.
15 In the confirmation dialog, click on the Yes command button to accept the
changes.
16 Click on the OK command button to close the New Rule Properties dialog.
Result: The DCM Policy Properties dialog should now display only the newly
entered rule.
17 Close the dialog to return to the MMC. Confirm that the new policy now appears
on the right pane.
18 Right-click on the new policy, and then choose Assign in the short-cut menu to
activate the policy.
If all of the above steps were performed correctly and the destination device is also
configured properly, the computer will now require IPsec to talk to the destination
device.
Note: If you have difficulty communicating with the destination device after
completing this procedure, ask your system administrator for assistance.
To Unassign IPSec
To disable IPsec on a computer running Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server, you
must unassign the IPsec policy as follows:
1 Open the Management Console as described in topic Accessing the IPsec
Management Console on page 619.
2 In the right hand pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IPsec
policy and point to Un-assign in the short-cut menu.
6 Select Connection Security Rules in the left hand pane of the dialog.
7 Right-click in the Connection Security Rules pane and point to New Rule... in
the short-cut menu.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule Type dialog is displayed.
8 Select the Server-to-server selection button and click on the Next > command
button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog is displayed.
9 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 1?, select the These IP addresses
selection button and click on the Add... command button.
Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 1 appears.
19 Leave all check boxes ticked and press the Next > command button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Name dialog is displayed.
20 In the Name box, enter a name for the IPsec connection (Headend IPs in the
example).
21 Click on the Finish button to close the wizard and to return to the Windows
Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.
4 In the Key exchange (Main Mode) selection box, select the Advanced selection
button and point to the corresponding Customize... command button.
Result: The Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.
5 In the Key exchange algorithm selection box, select the desired algorithm for key
exchange (Diffie-Hellman Group 2).
6 In the Security methods box, press the Add command button.
Result: The Security Method dialog appears.
9 In the Data integrity and encryption box, point to the Add... command button.
Result: The Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog is displayed.
a In the Protocol selection box, select the desired protocol for data protection
(ESP).
b In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption
algorithm for data protection (3DES).
c In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm
(MD5)
d In the Key lifetime (in minutes) box, enter or choose the time a key will be
used for data integrity before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be
chosen in the range from 5 minutes up to 2,879 minutes.
e In the Key lifetime (in KB) box, enter or choose the amount of data that will
be sent with a key before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be
chosen in the range from 20,480 KB up to 2,147,483,647 KB.
f Press the OK button to close the Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog
and to return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.
Result: The selected data protection method is added to the Data integrity and
encryption algorithms box.
Note: In the Data integrity and encryption algorithms box, at least one method must
match a data protection method of the destination device.
10 Press the OK command button to close Customize Data Protection Settings
dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog.
11 Press the OK command button to close the Customize IPsec Settings dialog and
to return to the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer
dialog.
12 Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.
AC
access criteria.
ac, AC
alternating current. An electric current that reverses its direction at regularly
recurring intervals.
AC-3
audio compression - 3.
AD
advertising.
AES
advanced encryption standard.
AH
authentication header.
ARP
address resolution protocol. Internet protocol used to map an IP addresses to
physical (hardware) addresses on local area networks.
ASI
asynchronous serial interface. Allows the intermittent transfer of data one bit at a
time rather than in a steady stream.
ASM
any source multicast
ATSC
Advanced Television Systems Committee of the USA.
AVC
advanced video coding
Avg
average.
BAT
bouquet association table.
BNC
A coaxial connector that uses two bayonet lugs on the side of the female
connector. BNC stands for Bayonet Neill Concelman and is named after
Amphenol engineer Carl Concelman.
CA
conditional access. The system, software, and components necessary to provide
or deny subscribers selective access to specific services.
CAM
conditional access module.
CAS
conditional access system.
CAT
conditional access table.
CBR
constant bit rate.
COP
code of practice.
CORBA
Common Object Request Broker Architecture. A communication pathway
between disparate Network Management Systems. CORBA is an architecture and
specification for creating, distributing, and managing distributed program objects
in a network. It allows programs at different locations and developed by different
vendors to communicate in a network through an interface broker.
CP
crypto period.
CRC
cyclic redundancy code.
CW
control word.
CWG
control word generator.
dc, DC
direct current. An electric current flowing in one direction only and substantially
constant in value.
DC-II
DigiGipher-II
DCM
digital content manager.
DHB
digital headend backup.
DPI
digital program insertion.
DSL
digital subscriber line. A technology for bringing up to 8.0 Mb/s of bandwidth to
homes and small businesses over ordinary twisted-pair copper telephone lines.
DSM-CC
digital storage media - command and control
DTF
digital transport formatter
DVB
A standard developed by the Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Group, which is a
European organization that has authored many specifications for satellite and
cable broadcasting of digital signals. Part of the DVB work has been focused
specifically on conditional access.
DVP
digital video platform.
ECM
entitlement control message.
ECMG
entitlement control message generator.
EIS
event information scheduler.
EIT
event information table.
EITa p/f
event information table actual present/following.
EITa sch
event information table actual schedule.
EITo p/f
event information table other present/following.
EITo sch
event information table other schedule.
EM
element manager.
EMM
entitlement management message.
EMMG
entitlement management message generator.
EN
European norm.
ES
elementary stream.
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
FCS
frame check sequence
FEC
forward error correction. System of data transmission in which redundant bits
generated at the transmitted end are used by the receiver to detect, locate, and
correct transmission errors before delivering the data to the local data
communications link. This avoids requiring the transmitter to resend
information.
FM
frequency modulation. A transmission technique in which the frequency of the
carrier varies in accordance with the modulating signal.
FTP
file transfer protocol. Allows users to transfer text and binary files to and from a
personal computer, list directories on the foreign host, delete and rename files on
the foreign host, and perform wildcard transfers between hosts.
GbE or GigE
gigabit Ethernet. A LAN transmission standard that provides a data rate of 1
billion bits per second. Gigabit Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard.
Gigabit Ethernet is carried primarily on optical fiber.
GMT
Greenwich mean time.
GUI
graphical user interface. A program interface that takes advantage of a computer
graphics capabilities to make the program visually easier to use.
HD or HDTV
high definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar to 35
mm movies with sound quality similar to compact disk (CD).
HTML
hypertext mark-up language. A language used to create documents on the World
Wide Web.
HTTP
hypertext transport protocol. A communication protocol used to request and
transmit files over the Internet and other networks.
I/O
input/output.
IANA
Internet assigned number authority.
ID
identifier.
IEC
International Electro-technical Commission.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE was founded in 1963. It is
an organization composed of engineers, scientists, and students and is best
known for developing standards for the computer and electronics industries.
IGMP
Internet group management protocol. A protocol used to established host
memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network.
IIOP
Internet inter-ORB protocol. A protocol developed to implement CORBA
solutions over the web. It enables browsers and servers to exchange integers,
arrays, and more complex objects. It is a protocol for communication between an
application programming interface (API) and an external client.
IKE
internet key exchange.
IP
Internet protocol. A standard that was originally developed by the United States
Department of Defense to support the internetworking of dissimilar computers
across a network. IP is perhaps the most important of the protocols on which the
Internet is based. It is the standard that describes software that keeps track of the
internetwork addresses for different nodes, routes, and outgoing/incoming
messages on a network. Some examples of IP applications include email, chat,
and Web browsers.
IPMP
intellectual property management and protection
IPsec
internet protocol security.
ISO
International Organization for Standardization. An international body that
defines global standards for electronic and other industries.
ITU
International Telecommunications Union.
LAN
local area network. A communications link between two or more points within a
small geographical area, such as between buildings. Typically permits data rates
up to 100 Mbps. Smaller than a metropolitan area network (MAN) or a wide area
network (WAN).
LED
light-emitting diode. An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes
through it.
MAC address
media access control address. A unique 48-bit number that identifies the
input/output card of a particular device. The MAC address is programmed into
the card by the manufacturer. The MAC sub-layer handles access to shared
media.
MD5
message digest 5 algorithm.
MHEG
multimedia/hypermedia expert group
MIB
management information base. SNMP collects management information from
devices on the network and records the information in a management
information base. The MIB information includes device features, data throughput
statistics, traffic overloads, and errors.
MMC
Microsoft management console.
MPEG
Motion Picture Experts Group. A joint committee of the International Standards
Organization (ISO) and the International Electrotechnical Commission (EG). This
committee develops and maintains the MPEG specification for a series of
hardware and software standards designed to reduce the storage requirements of
digital video and audio. The common goal of MPEG compression is to convert the
equivalent of about 7.7 MB down to under 150 K, which represents a compression
ratio of approximately 52 to 1. Current standards are MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and
MPEG-4.
MPTS
multi-program transport stream.
MQAM modulator
multiple quadrature amplitude modulation modulator. A device with two input
ports that allow it to receive MPEG transport streams simultaneously from two
different sources. The MQAM separates the content in these transport streams,
encrypts it, modulates it, and then sends it to DHCTs on the cable network. The
four, independent radio frequency (RF) outputs on the back panel of an MQAM
allow the cable operator to use only one unit of rack space for the hardware and
one unit of rack space for ventilation, while providing the same number of RF
output channels as four QAMs.
MTR
multi transport receiver
mux
multiplexer. A device that combines two or more signals into one output.
ESP
encapsulation security payload.
NIT
network information table.
NITa
network information table actual.
NITo
network information table other.
NMS
network management system. A software system designed specifically to monitor
a network and to facilitate troubleshooting.
NTP
network time protocol.
NTSC
National Television Standards Committee. A committee that determines video
signal standards for television displays in the United States, Canada, Mexico, and
Japan, as well as other Latin American and Asian countries. The NTSC standard
calls for fixed-resolution, interlaced displays that are updated 30 times per second
with a resolution of 525 lines.
NVOD
near video on demand.
ON ID
original network identifier.
ORB
object request broker.
PAL
phase alternate line.
PAT
program association table.
PC
personal computer.
PCR
program clock reference.
PD
private data.
PDG
private date generator.
PES
packetized elementary stream
PES
packetized elementary stream
PID
packet identifier or program identifier.
PMT
program map table. Identifies and indicates the locations of the streams that make
up each service, and the location of the Program Clock Reference fields for a
service.
PS
power supply
PSI
program specific information.
PSIG
program specific information/service information generator.
PSIP
program and system information protoco.l (A digital TV data transport
standard.)
PSU
power supply unit.
QAM
quadrature amplitude modulation. A phase modulation technique for
representing digital information and transmitting that data with minimal
bandwidth. Both phase and amplitude of carrier waves are altered to represent
the binary code. By manipulating two factors, more discrete digital states are
possible and therefore larger binary schemes can be represented.
RAM
random access memory. A type of computer memory that can be read from or
written to in a nonlinear fashion.
RCDS
remote control and diagnostics system.
RFC
request for comments.
RMA
return material authorization. A form used to return products.
ROSA
RCDS open system architecture.
RTP
real-time transport protocol.
RU
rack unit. RU is the measuring unit of vertical space in a standard equipment
rack. One RU equals 1.75" (44.5 mm).
SCG
scrambling control group.
SCS
simulcrypt synchronizer.
SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc. A not-for-profit professional
organization formed in 1969 to promote the sharing of operational and technical
knowledge in the field of cable television and broadband communications.
SD or SDTV
standard definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar
to digital versatile disk (DVD).
SDT
service description table.
SDTa
service description table actual.
SDTo
service description table other.
SECAM
squentiel couleur avec mmoire. (French color TV standard.)
SFP
small form-factor pluggable.
SHA1
secure hash algorithm version 1.0.
SI
system or service information. Tuning information sent from the DNCS to
DHCTs which provides the information that DHCTs need to be able to tune to a
particular service.
SID
service identifier.
SMS
short message service. (Cellular phone text messaging.)
SNMP
simple network management protocol. A protocol that governs network
management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions.
SPM
statmux pool manager
SPTS
single program transport stream.
SSM
source specific multicast
SVGA
super video graphics adapter. (800 by 600 pixels, 1.33:1 aspect ratio.)
TCP
transmission control protocol. One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks.
TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data.
TCP guarantees delivery of data and packets, and will be delivered in the same
order in which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery
of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called
packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.
TCP/IP
transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. Two interrelated protocols that
are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI transport layer
and breaks data into packets. IP operates on the OSI network layer and routes the
packets. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes
care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a
message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.
TDT
time and date table.
ToS
type of service
TOT
time offset table
TR
transrating.
TS
transport stream.
TS ID
transport stream identifier.
TTL
time to live. A field in many packet protocols that is used to ensure that packets
that do not find their destinations are eventually eliminated from the network.
UDP
user datagram protocol. A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of
IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services,
offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network
without acknowledgements for guaranteed delivery.
URL
uniform resource locator. A standardized way of representing different
documents, media, and network services on the World Wide Web. The URL is
most commonly referred to as the Web address for a particular item. For example,
the URL, or Web address, for Scientific Atlanta is
http://www.scientificatlanta.com.
VBR
variable bit rate.
VLAN
virtual local area network. A local area network with a definition that maps
workstations on some other basis than geographic location (for example, by
department, type of user, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can
change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth
allocation more easily than with a physical picture of the LAN. Network
Management System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the
local area network with the actual physical picture. VLANs are based on logical
instead of physical connections.
XOR
exclusive or.
Add Time Offset Descriptor table 267 Alarms related to outgoing services 534
Add Unit dialog 452, 455 Alarms related to outgoing Transport Streams
Add/Remove Snap-in dialog 620 532
Adding a Service to the Services List 414 Alarms sub page 510, 511, 512
Adding a Transport Stream 413 Algorithm Optimization parameter 303
Adding Access Criteria information 422 All Alarms table 510
Adding Components to a Service 415 Annex A FEC sending arrangement 159
Adding Conditional Access System 419 Annex B FEC sending arrangement 159
Adding ECMG Descriptor Rules 392 Applies to Data ID(s) parameter 400
Adding EMMG Descriptor Rules 400 Applies to ECM ID(s) parameter 392
Adding individual Transport Streams 131 Apply command button 8
Adding IPsec peers 51 ARP parameter 83
Adding login information 15 ARP sub page 71, 72
Adding PMT descriptors 236 ARP table entries 71
Adding preconfiguring service loss alarm triggers ASI input port configuration 57
517 ASI input type 178, 196, 250, 346
Adding security accounts 12 ASI Interface Card
Adding Service Component Tracking Rules 595 Concept 4
Adding Services to a Transrating Group 307 Introduction 2
Adding SPTSs to Multi-TS Transrating Groups Principle 5
323 ASI Interface Card mode 442, 443
Adding static route entries 49, 71 ASI output port configuration 59
Adding the Appropriate Snap-In 620 ASI port configuration 56
Adding Time Offset Descriptors 267 ASI Port numbering 56
Adding tracking rules 207 ASI port parameters 62
Adding VLAN port pairs 78 Assigning a backup Transport Stream 476
Additional features 442 Assigning a Service to a Transport Stream 414
Additional TS Info parameter 411 Assigning Access Criteria 424
Administrator security group 10 Assigning Access Criteria to Services or
Advanced parameters 389 Components 426
Advanced Settings dialog 438 Assigning Backup Services 470
Advanced Settings table 149, 150 Assigning ECMG interfaces 386
Advanced tab 149, 152, 389 Assigning EIS interfaces 404
Advanced tab page 149, 152 Assigning EMMG interfaces 396
Advanced TS Settings table 152 Assigning PSI/SI generator interface 407
Advertising server 342 Async Sources alarm 502
AF Insertion Rate parameter 444 Asynchronous Operation 449
Alarm message reporting 510 ATSC input standard 120
Alarm monitoring 501 Authentication Methods tab 632
Alarm overview 502 Auto Negotiation parameter 64, 69
Alarm severity 509 Auto Pass Rules 153
Alarms 502, 509, 525 Auto Referenced time base selection 120
Alarms details related to incoming services 531 Auto time base selection 120
Alarms details related to incoming Transport Auto type 206
Streams 528 Automatic Channel ID Selection parameter 386
Alarms details related to outgoing services 535 Automatic ECM ID Mode 434
Alarms details related to outgoing Transport Automatic mode 259
Streams 533 Automatic Start parameter 432
Alarms related to incoming services 529 Available Modules box 565
Alarms related to incoming Transport Streams Available Standalone Snap-ins box 620
527 Available VLAN IDs parameter 80
Changing default advanced Transport Stream Checking bit rates overview of components
settings 152 within outgoing services 551
Changing default PMT descriptor rule parameters Checking bit rates overview of components
244 within outgoing Transport Streams 552
Changing default service auto pass rules 182 Checking bit rates overview of components
Changing default service loss trigger alarms 519 within Transport Streams 547
Changing default tracking rules 212 Checking bit rates overview of incoming services
Changing default TS loss alarms triggers 522 542
Changing DPI settings outgoing services 278 Checking bit rates overview of incoming
Changing ECMG Descriptor Rules 394 Transport Streams 544
Changing ECMG Specific Parameters 386 Checking bit rates overview of outgoing services
Changing EIS interface connection parameters 553
405 Checking bit rates overview of outgoing
Changing EMMG Descriptor Rules 402 Transport Streams 549
Changing EMMG specific parameters 399 Checking bit rates overview of services within
Changing GbE port backup parameters 466 incoming Transport Streams 546
Changing IPsec connection defaults 649 Checking bit rates overview of services within
Changing IPsec filter 53 outgoing Transport Streams 550
Changing login information 15 Checking bit rates overview of services within
Changing ORB Trace Level 612 Transrating Groups 555
Changing outgoing service settings 274 Checking bit rates overview of Transrating
Changing PSI/SI generation mode 250 Groups 554
Changing PSIG interface connection parameters Checking bit rates overview tables 541
408 Checking EMM Component parameters 215
Changing scrambling parameters 378 Checking individual merged components 196
Changing scrambling settings outgoing services Checking merged services 195
275 Checking output bit rates 549
Changing SDT settings 263 Checking Private Data component parameter
Changing security account settings 12 221
Changing service backup switching parameters Checking service component settings 206
472 Checking service routing 272
Changing Service Properties 416 Checking Statmux Pool settings 460
Changing service settings 272 Checking the input bit rates 542
Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode 443 Checking Trace Logs 612
Changing Transport Stream Properties 416 Checking transrating comparison 314, 331
Changing transrating board settings 303 Checking unreferenced components settings
Changing Transrating Group parameters 309 231
Changing Transrating settings 321, 327 Choose Destination Location page 561
Changing transrating specific outgoing service Choose File dialog 19, 26, 237
settings 276 Client ID parameter 215, 221
Channel Closed by CA System alarm 502 Clock 41
Channel ID parameter 215, 221 Clock sub page 41, 42, 43
Check SCG at Provision Time parameter 382 Coarse Delay parameter 302, 303
Check Scrambling Control Group at Provisioning Cold reboot 29
Time Option parameter 382 Collapsing trees 96
Checking AD Server IP Address 353 Column FEC Stream IP parameter 160, 161,
Checking alarms 525 169, 171
Checking bit rates in service overview trees 538 Column IP parameter 163
Checking bit rates overview of components Column Socket Type parameter 163
within an incoming service 543 Communicating with computers that do not
support IPsec 627
Concept 4 Concept 4
Introduction 2 Introduction 2
Principle 5 Principle 5
GbE interface parameters 69
GbE Multicast input type 178, 196, 250
I
GbE Name and Network Settings table 64 I/O Settings table 57, 59, 61
GbE port backup 464 ICIM Policy Properties dialog 632
GbE port backup parameters 466 ID for <servicename> dialog 150, 414
GbE port backup scenarios 464 ID parameter 141, 146, 149, 152, 460
GbE port configuration 64 IDCM_ResId parameter 598
GbE port settings 64 Identify device by parameter 586
GbE Settings table 67 Identify Me utility 31
GbE statistics 88, 91 IGMP Multicast Groups 80
GbE Statistics sub page 88, 91 IGMP Settings table 80, 82
GbE UDP Boundary Settings table 68 IGMP sub page 80, 82
GbE Unicast input type 178, 196, 250 IIOP Protocol Driver 579, 586
General EIS type 404 Image legend 8
General PSIG type 407 Import Data From File parameter 237
Generate Alarms parameter 512 Import Device Settings from File parameter 26
Generate All EITa sch mode 250 Importing configuration settings 26
Generate EITa sch first 8 days mode 250 Importing device settings 24
Generate FEC errors 173 Importing PMT descriptors 237
Generate mode 250 Importing PSI 269
Generate Test Message command 510 Importing SI Data 602
Generated EMMs table 215, 217, 218 Include Core Files parameter 613
Generated Entitlement Management Message Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram 314, 331
Packet Identifier display mode 92 Incoming services
Generating test messages 510 Modifying Settings 118
Global (Counters) table 88 Representation mode 112, 115
Global Alarm Settings parameter 512 Viewing 96
Global counters 88 Increment Scheme parameter 146
Good Packets parameter 173 Indeterminate severity level 509
Guest security group 10 Information severity level 509
GUI Trace 610 Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table 241,
GUI version information 9 243, 244
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table
H
240, 243, 244
Hardware configuration 34 In-point 340
Hardware key 54 Input - Backup parameter 272
Hardware Key Inserted alarm 54 Input bit rates 542
Heartbeat Network Interface parameter 497 Input bit rates tables 541
Heartbeat Protocol Error alarm 507 Input Board Type Delay parameter 302, 303
Heartbeat UDP Port parameter 497 Input Card parameter 153, 178, 193, 196, 226
Hesule web server application 18 Input -Card parameter 272
High definition 17 Input -Card parameter 595
Housing Input EMM table 214, 220
Input filter 290
Input Gen. and Private Data PIDs parameter 93
Input IP Address parameter 153, 178, 193, 196,
226, 476
Input -IP Address parameter 272
Adding 51 Logging on 11
Deleting 51 Login information
IPsec Settings tab 649 Adding 15
IPsec Settings table 51, 53 Changing 15
Irdeto M_Crypt ECMG type 386 Disabling 16
Introduction 15
J Login page 11
Jitter parameter 43 Logout 11
Join or Modify Multicast Group table 80 lONID parameter 602, 604
Joining GbE ports to IGMP Multicast groups 80 Low Memory alarm 507
Joint command 80 lPID parameter 602
lPort parameter 600, 604
K lSID parameter 600
Key Exchange 50 lStreaming parameter 604
Key exchange algorithm parameter 649 lTSID parameter 602, 604
Key exchange parameter 649 lUDPPort parameter 600, 604
Key lifetime parameter 649
M
Key parameter 18, 444, 641
MAC & IP filtering 64
L MAC Address parameter 69, 71
L parameter 155, 160, 161, 169, 171, 173, 174 MAC Only filtering 64
Language parameter 206, 209, 415, 595 Macro Component 579
Last Input PID parameter 226 Macro Detail dialog 598
Last Poll parameter 43 Macros tab 598
Latency parameter 160, 161 Main - Backup Delay parameter 470, 476
Launching MMC 619 Main Service Source table 470
lCard parameter 600, 604 Main to Backup Delay parameter 497
lDCM_ResId parameter 600, 602, 604 Mainboard Trace 610
Leaving GbE ports to IGMP Multicast groups Maintenance sub page 29, 31, 615
80, 82 Major severity level 509
LEDS 31 Make Task dialog 584
Legend 8 Making task instances 584
Legend sub page 8 Manage Filter Actions tab 627
Length/Type out of range counter 88 Management - Port parameter 460
Leverage Bit Rate command 455 Manual (Custom) mode 346
License file 17, 19 Manual mode 346
License overview 18 Map Name parameter 453
License Overview table 18 Map Resources tab 586
Licenses 358 Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS 586
Licenses sub page 18, 19 Matching behavior component tracking rule 201
Licensing 17 Max Bit Rate parameter 276, 301, 310, 327
Link Loss alarm 502 Max. - Video Rate parameter 457
Link Loss and UDP Loss trigger alarm 464 Max. Bandwidth parameter 396, 407
Link Loss trigger alarm 464 MD5 627
Load Balancing 384 Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode
Load Components parameter 411 parameter 120, 122, 123, 124, 125
Load Model from Devices dialog 411 Menu appearance parameter 107, 110
Locating a passed service in a tree 117 Merged Service Source table 470
Log On As dialog 20, 608 Merged Services table 195, 198
Log tab 437 Merging components 190
Logging off 11 Merging individual components 193
Min - Video Rate parameter 457 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - name
Min Bit Rate parameter 276, 301, 310, 327 dialog 641
Minor severity level 509 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile
Mirror of Port parameter 61 dialog 641
Mirror port configuration 61 New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Mirroring parameter 67 Requirements dialog 641
Missing FEC Stream(s) alarm 502 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule
Missing in PAT - service loss alarm trigger 514 Type dialog 641
Missing Packets counter 167 New parameter 209, 215, 217, 221, 223, 231
MMC main screen 619 New Resource dialog 586
Mode parameter 39, 46, 91, 160, 161, 163, 166, New Rule Properties dialog 632
169, 171, 173, 174, 248, 250, 259, 346, 515, New/Link Map dialog 453
517, 521, 524 NIT 246, 255, 261, 269
Modifying incoming service settings 118 NIT in PAT table 259
Modifying incoming Transport Stream settings NITa 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
120 NITo 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
Modifying PMT descriptors 235 No Components to Scramble
Modifying tracking rules 209 CP Extension alarm 502
Modules parameter 611 No DTF Concentrator License Available alarm
MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group 502
300, 305 No DTF Scrambling License Available alarm
MPTS transrating 300 502
MTR 442 No ECMG Connection Available alarm 502
Multi Transport Receiver 442 No ECM's available
Multicast column socket type 163 CP Extension alarm 502
Multicast frames counter 88 No EMM resources available alarm 502
Multicast IP Address assignment 130 No FEC License Available (Decoding) alarm
Multicast IP Address parameter 80, 346 502
Multicast row socket type 163 No FEC License Available (Encoding) alarm
Multicast socket type 124, 163 502
Multicast type 160, 346 No scramblers 428
Multiplexing 95 No scramblers message 430
Multi-TS Transrating Groups 320 Non block aligned FEC arrangement 159
Muxing sub page 138, 177, 214, 308, 325 NTP client 343
mystro-videoport MIB 37 NTP Clock Offset alarm 507
NTP server 42, 343
N NTP Server Configuration parameter 42
Nagra NagraVision ECMG type 386 NTP Server IP Address parameter 42
Name parameter 34, 35, 55, 57, 59, 62, 64, 69, NTP Servers table 42
114, 195, 196, 205, 206, 236, 263, 290, 305, NTP Statistics 43
309, 320, 321, 346, 392, 400, 419, 422, 452, NTP Statistics command 43
455, 460, 586, 641 NTP Statistics sub page 43
Network ID parameter 246 NTP Statistics table 43
Network PID insertion 259 Number Format parameter 410, 433
Network Settings table 53 Number parameter 62, 69
New Authentication Method Properties dialog NumberFormat parameter 410, 433
632
O
New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Authentication Method dialog 641 Obtaining license files 18
New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Off mode 346
Endpoints dialog 641 Offset parameter 43
Row FEC Stream IP parameter 160, 161, 163, SD/HD Mismatch alarm 502
169, 171 SD/HD parameter 274
Row Socket Type parameter 163 SDT 246, 250, 255, 261, 263, 269
RTP output protocol 141 SDT parameter 263
Running Status parameter 263 SDT Settings table 265
SDTa 246, 250, 255, 261, 263, 269
S SDTo 246, 250, 255, 261, 263, 269
SA Specific EIS type 404 Search command 116
SA Specific PSIG type 407 Search Next command 116
Same IP and UDP + 2, UDP + 4 FEC streams Searching a service in a tree 116
163, 166, 174 Searching a Transport Stream in a tree 116
Same UDP and IP + 1, IP + 2 FEC streams 163, Second IP Address parameter 78
166, 174 Second Subnet Mask parameter 78
Save As dialog 24, 269, 270 Security 10
Save command 269 Configuring 12
SCG 365 Security accounts 10, 12, 13
SCG Accept Delay parameter 382 Security Accounts table 12, 13
SCG provisioning message 365 Security Group parameter 12
Scramble only Audio/Video parameter 382 Security groups 10
Scramble parameter 444 Security Log 610
Scrambler Properties 382 Security Method dialog 649
Scrambler Properties dialog 382 Security methods parameter 649
Scramblers corresponding with ON ID=X Security page 12, 13
TS ID=Y dialog 435 Select Computer or Domain dialog 620
Scrambling 357, 361 Selective Services type Transrating Group 300,
Scrambling Control 427 305
Scrambling Control Group 365 Sending Arrangement parameter 169, 171, 174
Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay Sending Arrangements 159
parameter 382 Service Auto Pass Rules table 153, 181
Scrambling Control Group provisioning message Service auto passing rules
365 Changing defaults 182
Scrambling Control Task 358, 427, 579 Introduction 181
Scrambling levels 369 Switching on or off 181
Scrambling license 17, 358 Service backup 467
Scrambling not started alarm 502 Service Backup Settings table 470
Scrambling parameter 275, 378 Service Bit Rates Overview table 541, 542, 553
Scrambling settings outgoing services 275 Service branch 102
Scrambling Settings table 275 Service components settings 205
Scrambling tab page 272, 275, 378 Service Components Settings table 206, 207,
Scrambling-Specific Parameters 380 208, 209
Script parameter 490 Service definition 17
SCS 361, 362 Service grooming 290
SCS Configurator 358, 380, 579 Service Grooming table 293
SCS Configurator dialog 382, 386, 389, 392, Service ID parameter 414
394, 395, 396, 399, 400, 402, 404, 405, 406, Service Identifier display mode 92
407, 408 Service in Backup (Service Loss) alarm 502
SCTE 30 278, 342 Service in Backup (TS Loss) alarm 502
SCTE 35 278, 344 Service Level Scrambling 369
SCTE-30/35 mode 278, 346 Service loss - Transport Stream loss alarm trigger
SCTE-35 Only (Custom) mode 278, 346 520
SCTE-35 Only mode 278, 346 Service Loss alarm 502
Service loss alarm triggers 514 SID parameter 92, 114, 122, 123, 124, 195, 196,
Service Loss at Output alarm 502 205, 206, 209, 290, 346, 517
Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter 519 Simulcrypt Scrambling 371
Service Loss Trigger Options parameters 519 Simulcrypt Synchronizer 361, 362
Service Name parameter 414, 416 Slot Details box 565
Service parameter 246 SNMP 36
Service passing rules 181 SNMP sub page 36, 37
Service Properties dialog 416 SNMP Trace 610
Service Provider Name parameter 263 SNMP Trap Destination Setting table 36, 37
Service Provider parameter 414, 416 SNMP Trap destinations 36, 37
Service re-multiplexing 176 SNMP Trap format 37
Service representation mode 112, 114 SNMP Trap table 37
Service Routings table 272, 286 Socket Type parameter 124, 163, 476
Service settings 272 Software upgrade 559
Service Settings table 118, 119, 274, 286, 472, Sort GbE TS in Tree by parameter 107, 110
515, 518 Sort Services in Tree by parameter 107, 110
Service sub page 118, 178, 286, 378, 517, 518 Source - IP Address parameter 460
Service Type parameter 263 Source IP Address parameter 80
Service View sub page 96 Source Stream Combining 442
Services list 414 Splice channels 346
Services sub page 119 Splice Insert Cue messages 344
Services table 314, 331 Splice Request messages 342
Services to Access Criteria list 426 Splicing Event Duration 342
Session key perfect forward secrecy parameter Splicing license 17
627 SPM 452
Setting the Communication Timeout parameters SPM resource 452
438 SPM Resource in ROSA 455
Setting up Bit Rate Budget 455 SPTS Transrating 317
Setting up IP statmux 452 Standalone Device Backup 492
Setting up maps 453 Standalone tab 620
Setting up Statistical Multiplexing Parameters Stand-Alone VBR parameter 455
457 Standard Coarse Delay mode 302
Setting up the IPsec connection 641 Standard definition 17
Setting up the Transport Stream Model 410 Standard ECMG type 386
Setting Up the TS Model Manually 413 Standard EIS Properties dialog 405
Settings menu 410, 434, 438 Standard PSIG Properties dialog 407
Settings sub page 515 standard TR delay 303
Settings tab page 272, 274 Start Delay 372
Severity level 509 Start IP Address parameter 146
Short-cut menu 7 Start Streaming all TSs command 283
Show All filter 261 Start UDP Port parameter 146
SI Distributor 579 Starting or Stopping Streaming 604
SI Table In Tree table 246 Starting scrambling 430, 436
SI Table Playout parameter 146, 256 Starting streaming 282
SI Table Settings table 248, 250, 259, 261, 270 Starting the Scrambling Control Task 432
SI Table sub page 248, 250, 256, 261, 270 Stat Muxed rate control 310, 327
SI Tree 246 Stat Muxed transrating mode 301
SI View sub page 246, 269 State parameter 62, 69, 482
SID 460, 470 Static ARP Settings table 71, 72
SID display mode 92 Static ARP table entries 71
Static route entries
TS Settings table 122, 123, 131, 143, 145, 289, Use UDP Port parameter 396
444 User Account Control dialog 641
TS sync loss - service loss alarm trigger 514 User Name parameter 10, 11, 12, 20, 118, 119,
TS Sync Loss alarm 502 608
TS tab 182 User Selected PCR PID Error alarm 502
TS tab page 182, 212 User Time parameter 41
TS UDP Port 615 User Time table 41
TS-Service Backup tab page 484, 519, 522 Users security group 10
TTL parameter 149, 150, 152 Using DCM Scripts 593
Type of Service parameter 149
Type parameter 18, 57, 62, 69, 160, 161, 195,
V
198, 205, 206, 209, 215, 221, 231, 240, 241, Valid Packets counter 167
244, 250, 305, 346, 392, 415, 443, 470 Value parameter 598, 600, 602, 604
Version 9
U
Version Info sub page 23
UDP boundary 68 Version information 22
UDP Loss alarm 502 Video quality 302
UDP output protocol 141 Video Rate Mode parameter 455
UDP parameter 160, 161, 163, 169, 171, 173, Viewing incoming services 96
195, 198, 206, 215, 231, 250, 290, 470 Viewing outgoing services 96
UDP Port + 1 increment scheme 146 Viewing PSI/SI information 246
UDP Port + 2 increment scheme 146 Viewing service grooming 290
UDP Port parameter 114, 124, 131, 141, 205, Viewing Trace Logs 610
346 Virtual Local Area Network 77
UDP stream loss - service loss alarm trigger 514 VLAN
UDP Stream Loss alarm 502 Adding VLAN port pairs 78
Undersized frames counter 88 Introduction 77
Undo Loop Throught command 139 Limitations 77
Unicast column socket type 163 Removing VLAN port pairs 79
Unicast row socket type 163 VLAN ID parameter 78, 141, 146
Unicast socket type 124, 163 VLAN identifier parameter 149
Unicast type 160, 346 VLAN ON parameter 146, 149, 150, 152
Units dialog 452, 455 VLAN port pairs
Unreferenced Pid Error alarm 502 Adding 78
Unreferenced PIDS main node 105 Introduction 77
Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached Removing 79
alarm 502 VLAN Priority parameter 141, 149
Unsolicited IGMP Message parameter 80 VLAN Settings 146
Update all channels table 346 VLAN Settings table 78, 79, 141, 143, 146
Update All table 310, 327 VLAN sub page 78, 79
Update All Transrating Groups table 320 VLAN tagged counter 88
Update all TS table 145, 150, 171, 321
Update License File parameter 19
W
Upgrade-It dialog 565 Warm reboot 29
Upgrade-It software package 561 Warning severity level 509
Upgrade-It tool 561, 565 Web browser user interface
Upgrading software 559
Upgrading the DCM software 565
Usage parameter 18
Use Default Settings parameter 131
Use this string (preshared key) 632
Introduction 6
Logging on or off 11
Security 10
Security accounts 10, 12, 13
Toolbars 9
Version 9
Windows Firewall with Advanced Security
dialog 641, 649
Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on
Local Computer dialog 649
Write Community parameter 38
Write community string 38